mssasgmi>mismmm ird cl s S ed I i rv||(;;r r I I I "^', I % |f«^fc!i<5^:;>«VJ/-;:'/^''. LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. Chap Copyrioht No.. s ■ Shelf ^,.C>_ 47 UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. CHARDENAL'S FRENCH EXERCISES FOR ADVANCED PUPILS REVISED SY DELPHINE DUVAL PROFESSOR OF FRENCH AT SMITH COLLBGB Boston ALLYN AND BACON 1900 _47695 ■•wo Cowts t€cc,»eo SEP 15 1900 OROt«0«V»SION, SfP 19 1900 T \\ C'^^ c.^'\ COPYKIGHT, 19 00, BY DELPHINE DUVAL. 80068 Norbjoato Press J. S. Gushing & Co. — Berwick & Smith Norwood Mass. U.S.A. PREFACE. In this edition of Cliardenars " Advanced Exer- cises " it has been my intention not so much to correct the book as to adapt it to the needs of American pupils, and to the scope of our courses of study. As the book is intended for pupils who have had one year of French in college, or two years in ele- mentary or preparatory schools, some words in vocabularies and some foot-notes in the first part, with which the student should be perfectly familiar, have been omitted. In the second part, the sen- tences in the French exercises have been reduced in number from eighteen in each exercise to eleven or twelve, and those in the English, with some changes, from thirty-six to twenty-five, thus avoid- ing too much repetition. For the greater convenience of the student, instead of two lists, one which refers both to the idiomatic verbs and to the idiomatic expressions has been sub- stituted. Many obsolete idioms have been omitted, and all the idioms in each exercise will be found in the section correspondingly numbered in the list. D. D. August 6, 1900. CONTENTS. ■ PAET FIEST. PAGE Syntax 1 The Article . . . . . . . . 1 The Partitive Article 3 The Article used before plus, mieux, etc. . . 4 The Noun 4 Plural of Compound Nouns 5 Collective Nouns 6 The Adjective. Agreement of Adjectives . . 6 The Place of Adjectives 7 The Government of Adjectives .... 8 The Comparison of Adjectives .... 9 Possessive Adjectives 10 Indefinite Adjectives 11 Numerals 13 The Pronoun. Place of Personal Pronouns . . 14 Order of Personal Pronouns before the Yerb . 16 Order of Personal pronouns after the Verb . . 17 ^n and F 18 The Pronoun Soi 19 The Pronoun Le 20 Possessive Pronouns 20 Demonstrative Pronouns 21 Interrogative and Relative Pronouns ... 24 Indefinite Pronouns 26 V VI CONTENTS. PAGE The Verb. Agreement of Verbs .... 28 The Place of the Subject 29 Passive Verbs 30 Pronoramal Verbs 31 The Past Tenses. 1. The Imperfect ... 32 2. The Preterite Definite . . . . - . 32 3. The Preterite Indefinite 33 The Future and the Conditional .... 34 The Subjunctive 35 Use of the Tenses of the Subjunctive ... 39 • The Infinitive 41 The Participle. The Present Participle . . 42 The Past Participle 43 The Adverb. Place of Adverbs .... 46 Particular Pules on Ne 47 The Preposition. De . . . . . .49 The Translation of To 50 Depuis, Pendant, Pour ...... 50 Dans and En 51 A and En 51 Fi^om .52 Pepetition of Prepositions . . . . . .52 The Conjunction Que 52 II. Exercises on Syntax 54 PAET SECOND. I. Exercises on Idioms 105 IT. Idiomatic Verbs and Phrases .... 183 III. Popular Sayings ... , . . 255 PART FIRST. I. PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX. THE ARTICLE. Rule 1. — The article is used in French before nouns denoting a general class, and must be repeated before each ; as, — Men fade away like floioers, Les hommes passent comme les fleurs. Moderation is the loise man' streas- La moderation est le tresor du ure, sage. The father and mother of that Le pere et la mere de cet enfant child are old, sont ages. ExcEPTTOXS. — The article is omitted : — (1) Before nouns in an enumeration ; as, — Children, parents, friends, stran- Enfants, parents, amis, etrangers, gers, all bewailed him, tous le pleurerent. (2) Before nouns usegl adverbially ; as, — He acts with integrity, II agit avec probite. I am friendless and penniless, Je suis sans ami, sans argent. Rule 2. — The article is used in French before names of countries, provinces, rivers, and mountains ; as, — Scotland has magnificent scenery, L'Ecosse a de magnifiques pay- sages. Did you ever see Loch Lomond? Avez-vous jamais vu le lac Lo- mond? B 1 2 THE ARTICLE. Exceptions. — The article is omitted before names of countries preceded by verbs of residence or motion, or by the preposition en, or used adjectively ;^ as, — She comes from Scotland, Elle vient d'Ecosse. He is gone from England to Spain, II est alle d' Angleterre en Espagne. The Queen of England, La reine d'Angleterre. Scotch pig-iron, De la fonte d'Ecosse. EuLE 3. — The article le, la, les is used for a or an sig- nifying per before nouns of weight, measure, or number ; but par is used for a or an before nouns of time ; as, — Three francs a yard, Trois francs le metre. Fivepence a pound, Cinquante centimes la livre. Ten francs a hundred, Dix francs le cent. A guinea a month, Une guinee par mois. EuLE 4. — The article used in English before a noun in apposition or before a noun denoting a person's country, business, title, etc., is omitted in French;' as, — * As it is sometimes difficult to ascertain when the name of a country- is used adjectively, observe that de, between two nouns, makes, as it were, an adjective of the second noun, and, therefore, that the real and chief object in the mind is pointed out by the first noun, and qualified by the second. In un appartement de roi, the chief object is an apart- ment, the beauty of which is worthy of a king; whereas, in I'apparte- ment du roi, roi is pointed out by the article as the owner, and it serves also to distinguish that apartment from others ; as, — Le roi de France, Le roi des Frangais. Les vins de France, Les avantages de la France. Les ports d* Angleterre, Les richesses de I'Angleterre. Du poisson de mer, Du poisson de la mer du Nord. -— Merlet. ■^ But the article must be used before : — (1) Names of some notorious persons, those of celebrated actresses, and a few Italian names; as, la Brinvilliers, la Champmesle, le Tasse, T Arioste. (2) Proper nouns denoting a literary production ; as, le Cinna de Comeille. (3) A saint's day ; as, la Saint-Pierre, la St. Jean. (4) Proper names in the plural ; as, les Cicerons sont rates. THE ARTICLE. 3 Augustus, the nephew of Caesar, Auguste, neveu de Cesar. He is a clergyman, II est ecclesiastique. She is a Frenchvwman, EUe est Frangaise. EuLE 5. — The article is omitted in p roverbi al sen- tences^ and before the numeral_fqllomiig the name of a ruler; as, — A good name is better than a golden Bonne renommee vaut mieux que girdle, ceinture doree. Henrij the Fourth, Henri quatre. Rule 6. — The article is omitted after que or quel used as an exclamation ; as, — What a noise for nothing ! Que de bruit pour rien ! What a had day ! Quelle affreuse joumee ! The Partitive Article. Rule 7. — Some or any, expressed or understood before a noun, is translated by du, de la, de 1', or des ; as, — / have eaten bread and cheese, J'ai mange du pain et du fromage. That man has courage. Get homme a du coeur. Exceptions. — (1) De alone is used when the noun is preceded by an adjective; as, — Some good bread, De bon pain. But if the adjective and the noun form a single idea (as beaux-arts, belles-lettres, bon mot, grand-p^re, jeunes gens, etc.), du, de la, de 1', or des must be used ; as, — Some fops, Des petits-maitres. (2) De alone is used when the verb is negative; as, — He has no courage, II n'a pas de coeur. If, however, the noun be followed and modified by an adjective or a subordinate sentence, the article should be used; as, — 4 THE NOUN. / have not such mean feelings, Je n'ai point des sentiments si bas. Never give advice which it may he Ne donnez jamais des conseils qu^l dangerous to follow, soit dangereux de suivre.* The Article used before Plus, M/'eux, Moins. Rule 8. — The article le is invariable when it forms, with plus, mieux, or moins, an adverbial expression modi- fying an adjective, a verb, or an adverb; as, — She is happiest when with her chil- C'est aupres de ses enfants qu'elle dren, est le plus heureuse. It is for music that they have the C'est pour la musique qu'elles sont greatest talent, le plus heureusement douees. It is she who expresses herself the C'est elle qui s'exprime le plus elo- most eloquently , quemment. It is what she likes best, C'est ce qu'elle aime le mieux. But the article is variable when there is a comparison between persons or things ; in this case a noun is always understood; as, — Of all women she is the happiest, De toutes les femmes, c*est la plus heureuse (femme). The most usefid arts are 7iot the Les arts les plus utiles ne sont pas most esteemed, (les arts) les plus consideres. THE NOUN. EuLE 9. — In English a noun qualifying another noun precedes it, and usually has the force of an adjective. * The article is also used in interrogative and negative sentences to express an affirmation, but it is omitted to express a doubt ; as, — (Affirmation.) {Doubt.) Pourquoi vous chagrinez-vous? n'avez-vous Quoi! n*avez-vous pas pas des amis pour vous distraire? d'amis? In Uke manner we say : II ne peut parler sans faire des fautes ; that is, il fait des fautes ; the sense is affirmative in spite of the negation. II parle sans faire de fautes ; that is, il ne fait pas de fautes ; the sense is negative in spite of the affirmation. THE NOUN. 6 In Frencli the qualifying noun stands last. If it in- dicates the material of which a thing is made, or is the name of a place, the preposition de is used ; as, — A marble table, Une table de marbre. A gold pen, Une plume d'or. Burgundy loine, Du vin de Bourgogne. Lyons silk, De la sole de Lyons. EuLE 10. — If the qualifying noun indicates use, pur- pose, or fitness, the preposition a is used; as, — A milk jug, Un pot a lait. A dining-room, Une salle a manger. A steamboat, Un bateau a vapeur. A paper-knife, Un couteau a papier. Plural of French Compound Nouns. Rule 11. — French compound nouns must be analyzed in order to see whether the sign of the plural should or should not be used, observing that, in the comipound, only nouns and adjectives may take the mark of the plural; as, — Garde-fou, plural des garde-fous ; that is, rails to protect fools, hand- rails. Garde-suisse, plural des gardes-suisses ; that is, Siviss Guards. Avant-coureur, plural des avant-coureurs ; that i^, fore-runners. , Reveille-matin, plural des reveille-matin ; that is, clocks which aivaken one in the morning, alarm-clocks. Coq-a-l'ane, plural des coq-a-l'ane ; that is, rambling discourses in which the speaker wanders from one subject to another quite different, du coq a I'ane. Pied-a-terre, plural des pied-a-terre ; that is, places where one dwells, temporarily, where one has only one foot alighted. Cure-dents, plural des cure-dents; that is, an instrument for picking the teeth, a toothpick. Tete-a-tete, jDlural des t«te-artete ; that is, an interview between two persons, /ace to face. THE ADJECTIVE. Collective Nouns. EuLE 12. — General collective nouns (that is, repre- senting the whole of the persons or things mentioned, as Tarmee, la f amille, le parlement, le peuple) are preceded by le or la, and require their verb, adjective^ and pronoun to be put in the singular ; as, — The people have been conquered^ Le peuple a ete vaincu. The croivd of spectators applauded, La foule des spectateurs applaudit. KuLE 13. — Partitive collective nouns (such as une foule, un certain nombre, une infinite, une douzaine, etc.), when they are preceded by un or une, require their verb, adjective, and pronoun to agree in gender and number with the noun following de ; as, — A croiod of children followed him, Une foule d'enfants le suivaient. THE ADJECTIVE. The Agreement of Adjectives. EuLE 14. — A predicate adjective or participle modify- ing two or more nouns of different genders is put in the masculine plural ; as, — My father and mother are old, Mon pere et ma mere sont ages. Exceptions. — In the two following cases a;n adjective placed after two or more nouns agrees with the last : — (1) When the nouns are synonymous ; as, — An astonishing valor and bra- Un courage, une bravoure eton- very, nante. (2) When the nouns are united by the conjunction ou ; as, — An astonishing courage or pru- Un courage ou une prudence eton- dence, nante. THE ADJECTIVE. 7 EuLE 15. — Adjectives used adverbially, that is, modi- fying a verb, are invariable ; as, — How sweet these flowers smell ! Que ces fleurs sentent bon ! She sings false, Elle chante faux. These paintings cost dear, Ces peintures coutent cher. The Place of Adjectives. Most adjectives may be placed either before or after their nouns; but some are subject to certain rules, which, though not absolute, are of great assistance. EuLE 16. — (1) The following adjectives, used singly, generally precede the noun : — joli, pretty. petit, little. mechant, luicJced. beau, ,/fne. jeune, young. triste, sad. brave, brave. vieux, old. vilain, ugly. grand, gi^eat, big. ancien, ancient, premier, first. gros, large, stout. bon, good. dernier, last. mauvais, bad. (2) When the noun is followed by a preposition, the adjective always precedes it; as, — The splendid speech of that orator. Le magnifique discours de cet ora- teur. (3) The adjective generally comes first when it has fewer syllables than the noun ; as, — Une fausse modestie. Une basse intrigue. Un juste chatiment. Une haute montagne. EuLE 17. — The following are usually placed after the noun: — (1) Adjectives of color, form, taste, and nationality. (2) Participles used adjectively. 8 THE ADJECTIVE. (3) Two or more adjectives qualifying the same noun. (4) An adjective having more syllables than its noun.^ The red coats^ Les habits rouges. A round tables Une table ronde. A hitter orange, Une orange amere. An English poem, Un poeme anglais. An accomplished man, Un homme accompli. An industrious and prudent lad, Un gargon laborieux et sage. The Government of Adjectives. EuLE 18. — The prepositions, of, from, by, ivith, follow- ing an adjective or a participle, are generally translated by de without the article ; as, — He is a young man endoioed loith C'est un jeune homme doue de great qualities, grandes qualites. But if the noun is taken in a restricted or limited sense, the article must be used with de ; as, — He is a young man endoioed loith C'est un jeune homme doue des the qualities requisite for such qualites requises pour cette an office, fonction. EuLE 19. — Adjectives and participles expressing want, scarcity, plenty, capability, satisfaction, absence, separa- tion, or desire, require the preposition de before their complement; as, — Full of wit, Plein d^esprit. Proud of his coat, Fier de son habit. ^ Eager for honors, A vide d'honneurs. * lu addition to these few rules, observe that, when an adjective is a mere ornament, which could be suppressed without altering the meaning of the sentence, it generally comes before the noun, as it thus gives more energy to the expression ; as, un vil scelerat. If, on the contrary, the adjective is absolutely necessary to complete the expression and give it a clear meaning, it is placed after the noun ; as, un homme vil. THE ADJECTIVE. 9 Rule 20. — Adjectives and participles expressing apt- ness, fitness, ease, readiness, usefulness, necessity, re- semblance, inclination, disposition, end, tendency, or any habit, require the preposition a before their com- plement; as, — Fit for war, Propre a la guerre. Useful to his country, Utile a son pays. Ready to go, Pret a partir. Inclined to idleness, Enclin a la paresse. EuLE 21. — If two adjectives qualifying the same noun require different prepositions before their complements, each adjective must have its separate complement; as, — He is useful to and loved by his II est utile a sa famille et en est family, cheri. This rule applies equally to verbs and prepositions. Thus, do not say, 11 aime et obeit a ses parents, but 11 aime ses parents et leur obeit, as aimer requires no preposition after it, while obeir is always followed by a. Do not say, plaider centre ou en faveur de quelqu^un, but plaider contre quelqu'un ou en sa faveur. Rule 22. — An adjective following the impersonal il est requires de before an infinitive ; as, — - It is glorious to die for one's conn- II est glorieux de mourir pour son try, pays. The Comparison of Adjectives. EuLE 23. — By after a comparative, in after a superla- tive, and than before a numeral are translated by de ; as, — I am stronger by far than he, Je suis de beaucoup plus fort que lui. He is the best man in the loorld, C'est le meilleur homme du monde. It is more than three o'clock, II est plus de trois heures. 10 THE ADJECTIVE. EuLE 24. — Than before an affirmative indicative is translated by que . . . ne ; as^ — She is poorer than you thinks Elle est plus pauvre que vous ne pensez. Exception. — If the first clause of the sentence is neg- ative or interrogative^ or if there is an adverb between que and the verb, the ne is left out ; as, — One cannot lose a kingdom more On ne peut perdre un royaume plus gayly than you do, gaiement que vous le faites. Is it worse weather than you were Est-ce qu'il fait plus mauvais told? temps qu'on vous le disait? He is better than when he loas in II se porte mieux que quand il etait London, a Londres. EuLE 25. — Than before an infinitive is translated by que de or qu'a, according as the preceding verb requires de or a ; as, — It is easier to say it than to do it, II est plus facile de le dire que de le faire. He is thinking more of playing Ilpenseplusajouerqu'atravailler. than icorking, Rule 26. — The before a comparative is not expressed in French ; as, — The Hcher a man is, the more cares Plus un homme est riche, plus 11 a he has, de soucis. Possessive Adjectives. Rule 27. — (1) When a possessive adjective (771?/, thy^, his, her, our, your, their) is used with a noun denoting a part of the body, the noun being the direct object of a verb, the adjective is expressed in French by to me, to_ thee, to him, to her, to us, to you, or to them; as, — He broke my finger, l\ m'a casse le doigt. T//e dog vkis biting his leg, Le chien lui mordait la jambe. He loillpull out your teeth, l\ vous arrachera les dents. THE ADJECTIVE. 11 (2) If the possessor is clearly shown, suppress the pro- noun to me, to thee, to him, to her, etc.; as, — He lost his right leg in the battle, II a perdu la jambe droite dans la bataille. (3) With the three words, mal {pain), froid (cold), and chaud {warm), use the A^erb avoir, and make the person the subject of the verb; as, — Her feet are sore, Elle a mal aux pieds. My hands are very cold, J'ai bien froid aux mains. Indefinite Adjectives. B.ULE 28. — (1) Quelque (^whatever, hoivever, some, a few), when followed by a noun, is spelt as one word, and varies whether qualified by an adjective or not; as, — Whatever faidts you have com- Quelques fautes que vous ayez mitted, I forgive you, commises, je vous pardonne. (2) Quelque, preceding a participle or an adverb, or an adjective not followed by its noun, is an adverb, and consequently invariable ; as, — Hoioever powerful they a^'e, Quelque puissants qu'ils soient. (3) Quelque, preceding a numeral, is an adverb, and invariable ; as, — We fired about five or six thousand Nous avons tire quelque cinq ou shots, " six mille coups de canon. (4) Quel que, preceding a verb, is spelt as two words (quel, variable, and que) ; as, — Whatever be his inclinations, the Quels que soient ses penchants, le wise man sw^nounts them, sage les surmonte. Buy that house, in lohatever state Achetez cette maison quelle qu'elle it is, soit. 12 THE ADJECTIVE. Rule 29. — (1) Tout is an adjective, and consequently varies, when it means every, each, or all; as, — Evei^y woman, Toute femme. All men, Tous les hommes. (2) Tout is an adverb, and consequently invariable, , when it means quite, entirely, however ; it tlien precedes an adjective, a participle, a noun used as an adjective, or an adverb ; as, — We are quite exhausted, Nous sommes tout epuises. These floicers are quite as fresh as Ces fleurs sont tout aussi fraiches yesterday, qu'hier. She is entii^ely yours, Elle est tout a vous. This material is all loool, Cette etoffe est tout laine. ExcEPTio:^-. — The adverb tout varies, for the sake of euphony, when placed before a feminine adjective or participle beginning with a consonant or an aspirate h; no ^ She is quite stunned, Elle est toute stupefaite. (3) Tout, followed by au' e, is invariable if it means quite, but it varies if it means any ; as, — I have quite a different ambition, J'ai une tout autre ambition. Jealousy misleads more than any La jalousie egare plus que toute other passion, autre passion. (4) Tout, placed before the name of a town, agrees with the word peuple understood, and is therefore masculine ; as, — All Rome is overwhelmed ivith Tout Rome est consteme. grief, EuLE 30. — Meme is used either as an adjective or an adverb. THE ADJECTIVE. 13 (1) It is an adjective, and varies : — a. Before a noun; as, — All nations are alike: the same Lespeuplesseressemblent partout: viceSj the same virtues^ memes vices, memes vertus. h. After a pronoun ; as, — Eux-memes, elles-memes, ceux memes. c. After a single noun ; as, — The Greeks themselves are wearied Les Grecs memes sont las de lui. of him, (2) Mime is an adverb, and invariable : — a. When it means even; as, — His remorse ivas evident even to Ses remords ont paru meme a nos our eyes, yeux. Every citizen ought to obey the Tout citoyen doit obeir aux lois, laws, even when unjust, meme injustes. h. When it means also, besides, which is the case when it comes after two or more nouns ; as, — - Les animaux. les plantes meme, etaient au nombre des divinites egyp- tiennes. Numerals. EuLE 31. — Vingt and cent are used in the plural when they are multiplied by another number; as, — Quatre-vingts. < Trois cents. ExcEPTioxs. — (1) If vingt and cent are followed by another number, they are not put in the plural ; as, — Quatre-vingt-huit soldats. Trois cent un. (2) Vingt and cent, used for vingti^me, centi^me, are invariable ; as, — Chapitre quatre-vingt. Page trois cent. 14 THE PRONOUN. If cent is used for centaine, it is then a noun, and takes the mark of the phiral ; millier, million, milliard, etc., are treated in the same way ; as, — Tioo hundred lots of fagots, Deux cents de fagots. Three hundred bundles of straw, Trois cents de paille. EuLE 32. — When a noun is preceded by a numeral, or by an adverb of quantity, the preposition de is introduced if a past participle follows ; as, — There loerefive houses burnt, II y a eu cinq maisons de brulees. There were many men killed, II y a eu beaucoup d'hommes de tues. EuLE 33. — Premier is the only ordinal number used for a date ; it is also used to designate the first of a line of princes ; beyond the first, the cardinal numbers must be used; as, — The tenth of August, Le dix aout. January first, Le premier Janvier. Henry first, Henri premier. THE PRONOUN. Place of Personal Pronouns. EuLE 34. — Personal pronouns in the objective case must be placed immediately before the verb in simple tenses, and before the auxiliary in compound tenses. The pronouns must then be translated by : — me, me, to me. nous, us, to us. te, thee, to thee. vous, you, to you. lui, to him, to her, to it. leur, to them, le, him, it. les, them. la, her, it. les, them. As, — / see him, Je le vois. I have seen him, Je I'ai vu. I have not seen him, Je ne Pai pas vu. THE PRONOUN. 15 Exceptions. — The pronoun stands after the verb, and is translated by : — moi, me. lui, him. nous, us. eux, them. toi, thee. elle, her. vous, you. elles, them.* (1) When the pronoun is preceded by any preposition but to; as, — The2/ came after us, lis sont venus apres nous. Go with him, AUez avec lui. Observe. — The English preposition to does not come under this exception, as the French have retained from the Latin the simple words nous (nobis), vous (vobis)^ me {iiiihi), te (tibi), lui (ei), to express the relation marked in English by the two words to us, to you, to me, to thee, to him, etc. However, a is used with the pronouns after the following verbs : — accourir a, marcher a, renoncer a, aller a, parvenir a, retoumer a, en appeler a, penser a, revenir a, boire a, tenir a, venir a, courir a, songer a, viser a, faire allusion a, prendre garde a, voler a, faire attention a, recourir a, etre a, and all verbs in which avoir enters ; as, avoir recours a, avoir affaire a, avoir egard a, etc. (2) When the pronoun is preceded by a pronominal verb; as, — You may trust me, < Vous pouvez^ous fier a moi. * The following also should be learnt by heart and known per- fectly : — Before the Verb. After the Verb. me, myself. , ^ > te, thyself. rrio\-mQmQ, myself, nous-memes, ourselves. se, himself, herself, one's self, toi-meme, thyself vous-memes, yourselves. nous, ourselves. Im-meme, himself, eux-memes, themselves. vous, yourselves. Q\\Q-inQnie,herself.Q\\QS-mQmes, themselves. se, themselves. 16 THE PRONOUN. (3) When several pronouns in the same case are the objects of the verb ; as, — / speak to you and to hhrL, Je parle a vous et a lui. They have invited you, me, and On a invite toi, moi, et nos amis. our friends, (4) When the verb is in the imperative mood without a negation;^ as, — Give me, donnez-moi. Give him, donnez-lui. Give it to me, donnez-le-moi. Give it to him, donnez-le-lui. Pronouns used with the imperative mood without a negation must be translated as in Rule 38. Order of Personal Pronouns when placed before the Verb. Rule 35. — When two personal pronouns are to be placed before the verb, they stand in the following order : — Me le, it to me. Nous le, it to us. Me les, them to me. Nous les, them to us. Te le, it to thee. Vous le, it to you. Te les, them to thee, Vous les, thein to you. Le lui, it to him, to her. Le leur, it to them. Les lui, them to him, to her. Les leur, them to them. As, — He loill grant it to us, II nous Paccordera. I had not asked it of (to) you, Je ne vous Pavais pas demande. He has not promised them to theyn, 11 ne les leur a pas promis. Observe. — (1) Him to me, him to thee, etc., are trans- lated the same as it to me, it to thee, etc. If the pronoun it has to be put in the feminine in French, it becomes la ; as me la, te la, nous la, etc. * If there are two imperatives united by et or ou, the pronoun may- be placed before the second, as in this line of Boileau : Polissez-le sans cesse et le repolissez. THE PRONOUN. 17 (2) When two pronouns have to be placed before the verb, the pronoun representing a person stands first, if it is of the first or second person (as, me, te, nous, vous); and last, if it is of the third (as, lui, leur).=^ Rule 36. — When the adverb y {there) is used with the above pronouns, it comes after them; as, — I will carry them to you there, Je vous les y porterai. EuLE 37. — En (some, of it, of them) used with any pro- noun or with y comes after it ; as, — He ivill give some to him, II lui en donnera. I saw three there, J'y en ai vu trois. Order of Personal Pronouns when placed after the Verb (Imperative Mood). EuLE 38. — When the verb is in the imperative mood affirmative, the personal pronouns are translated and dis- posed as follows : — Give it to me, Donnez-le-moi. Give them to me, Donnez-les-moi. Give it to us, Donnez-le-nous. Give them to us, Donnez-les-nous. Give it to him, to her, Donnez-le-lui. Give them to him, *o her, Donnez-les-lui. Give it to them, Donnez-le-leur. Give them to them, Donnez-les-leur. Send her to me. Envoy ez-la-moi, etc., etc. If the imperative is negative, the pronouns precede it in the form and order given in Eule 35 ; as, — Do not give it to me, Ne me le donnez pas. * In the rare cases when we have to translate me to thee, to him, to her, to you, to them, or thee to me, to him, to her, to us, to them, etc., we place the direct object before the verb, and the indirect after ; as. You have not yet introduced us to them, Vous ne nous avez pas encore presentes a eux. c 18 THE PRONOUN. EuLE 39. — En used with any other pronoun follows it: — Give some to me, Donnez-m'en. Give some to him, to her, Donnez-lui-en. Give some to us, Donnez-nous-en. Give some to them, Donnez-leur-en. y EuLE 40. — The position of y is as follows : — Carry me there, Portez-y-moi. Carry him there, Portez-y-le. Carry us there, Portez-nous-y. Carry them there, Portez-y-les. Observe. — Y used with moi^ toi^ le, la, and les, pre- cedes them by exception^ for the sake of euphony. En and Y. EuLE 41. — En is sometimes a pronoun, sometimes a preposition (Eules 97 and 98). When a pronoun, it means of him, of her, of it, of them, some, any, some of it, some of them, hence, thence, for that, etc. It is generally applied to things, but sometimes to persons also, in order to avoid the repetition of de lui, d'elle, d'eux, d'elles, or a lui, etc. ; as, — Have they spoken of my misfor- A-t-onparledemonmalheur? Oui, tune f Yes, they have, on en a parle. We expect nothing from it. Nous n'en attendons rien. / complained of her yesterday, Je me suis plaint d'elle hier, et je and shall again to-day, m'en plaindrai encore aujour- d'hui. EuLE 42. — When a numeral is not followed by the noun to which it refers, the French generally put en before the verb;"^ as, — * The same rule applies to adverbs of quantity (combien, beaucoup, assez, etc.), to nouns expressing a quantity (un quart, une moitie, une THE PRONOUN. 19 Have yon any brothers? Avez-vous des freres? Yes, I have one, Oui, j'en ai un. See, besides, Rules 37 and 39. EuLE 43. — Y is sometimes a pronoun, sometimes an ad- verb. When a pronoun, it means to it, to them, in speaking of tilings, but sometimes it is also applied to persons; as, — Do you trust that man ? Vous fiez-vous a cet homme ? Yes, I do, Oui, je m'y fie. When an adverb, y means in it, there, thither, here, whether expressed or understood in English; as, — Is your cousin in your room? She Votre cousine est-elle dans votre ivas, but now she is 710 longer, chambre? Elle y etait, mais maintenant elle n'y est plus. Observe. — There (expressed or understood) is trans- lated by la, vv^hen pointing to a |)lace, and by y, when alluding to a place mentioned before; as, — Do you see that house ? Voyez-vous cette maison-la ? I lived there three months, J'y ai demeure trois mois. See, besides, Rules 36, 37, and 40. The Pronoun Soi. EuLE 44. — Soi may be : (1) a pronoun representing a thing; (2) a personal pronoun used in an indefinite sense ; (3) a personal pronoun used in a definite sense to avoid an ambiguity ; as, — Crime brings remorse in its train, Le crime traine apres soi des re- molds. Every one for himself , Chacun pour soi. Thisyoung nian,iohile obeying his Ce jeune homme, en obeissant a son father, is vjorking for himself, pere, travaille pour soi. douzaine, une vingtaine, etc.), and to the indefinite pronouns aucun and quelques-uns, or quelques autres. 20 THE PRONOUN. The Pronoun Le (so). EuLE 45. — The pronoun le, whicli is sometimes ren- dered in English by so, but generally omitted, may relate: (1) to a substantive; (2) to an adjective; or (3) even to a whole sentence. (1) When it represents a substantive, or an adjective used substantively, it agrees in gender and number; as, — Areyou Mr. Smith's friends? Yes, Etes-vous les amis de M.Smith? we are, Oui, nous les sommes. Are you the sick ivoman they speak Etes-vous la malade dont ils par- of? Yes, I am, lent? Oui, je la suis. (2) When it represents an adjective, or a substantive used adjectively, it is invariable; as, — J.re you sick ? Yes, toe are, Etes-vous malades ? Oui, nous le sommes. Are you brothers? No, ive are Etes-vous freres? Non, nous ne not, le sommes pas. (3) When it represents a whole sentence, it is invari- able ; as, — Did your sister go to the ball yes- Mademoiselle votre sceur est elle terday ? I do not know, allee au bal hier ? Je ne le sais pas. Possessive Pronouns. EuLE 46. — Mme, thine, etc., after the verb to be, are generally expressed by k moi, a toi, etc. ; otherwise they are translated by le mien, les miens, le tien, les tiens, etc. ; as, — This hat is mine, Ce chapeau est a moi. These gloves are hers, Ces gants sont a elle. Where did you see mine ? Ou avez-vous vu les miens ? EuLE 47. — The English possessive pronouns are ex- pressed by mon, ma, mes, ton, ta, tes, etc., when used with o/ after a substantive; as, — THE PRONOUN. 21 A friend of yours^ Un de vos amis. What do tjou say of that hat of Que dites-vous de mon chapeau?^ mine ? Demonstrative Pronouns. C'esf, ce sont. Rule 48. — C'est or ce sont ^ is used : — (1) Before a substantive;^ as, — They are joiners, Ce sont des menuisiers. This sentence may also be translated thus : lis sont menuisiers ; but then menuisiers is used adjectively. (2) Before a pronoun; as, — It is I, C'est moi. Is it you ? Est-ce vous ? It is mine, C'est a moi, or c'est le mien. (3) Before a superlative of things, and often before a superlative of persons ; as, — This is the best of my hats, C'est le meilleur de mes chapeaux. He is the best lad in the luorld, C'est le meilleur gargon du monde. (4) When the impersonal verb it is ^ is placed before * Sometimes we jocosely say un mien ami, un tien cousin, une sienne niece. This familiar expression, however, does not apply to notre, votre, leur. — Mariette . ■^ V^hen c'est or ce sont is used, put ce sont before a third person plural only; in all other cases use c'est. + By a very rare exception, Faites monter monsieur. to come up stairs, ^ THE PARTICIPLE. The Present Participle. EuLE 86. — The present participle, which is essentially part of the verb, must not be confounded with the verbal adjective, which is an adjective derived from a verb (such as, un animal rampant, ime m^re prevoyante, une passion dominante). The present participle always expresses an action, and is invariable ; as, — These men, foreseeing the danger, Ces hommes, prevoyant le danger, put themselves on their guard, se mirent sur leurs gardes. The verbal adjective always expresses a quality of the noun which it qualifies, a state, or a manner of being, and agrees like other adjectives ; as, — These far sighted men perceived Ces hommes prevoyants ont apergu the datiger, le danger. EuLE 87. — The present participle is seldom used in French. When it can be avoided by changing the English participle into a tense of the indicative with qui, or into a substantive, or by giving the sentence a different turn, it must be done; as, — I hear your father calling you, J'entends votre pere qui vous ap- peUe. Your father's being angry loith La colere de votre pere centre moi ?ne is the cause of my sadness, est la cause de ma tristesse. My scolding of you is of no use, II ne me sert de rien de vous gronder. THE PARTICIPLE. 43 The Past Participle. EuLE 88. — The past participle, used without an auxil- iary verb, or with the auxiliary verb etre, agrees, like an adjective, with the noun or pronoun to which it relates ;^ as, — Concealed enmitrj is dangerous y Les inimities cachees sont dange- reuses. Selfish men are despised, Les egoistes sont meprises. ExcEPTiox. — The past participles of pronominal verbs, though always conjugated with etre, do not come under this rule, but under the following one, as with them itre has the meaning of avoir. EuLE 89. — The past participle used with avoir agrees, not with its subject, but with its direct object, when this object is placed before it; as, — Here is the loatch I bought, Void la montre que j'ai achetee. They have rejoiced at your happi- lis se sont rejouis de votre bonheur. ness, They have shoicn it to each other, II se la sont montree. Hoic many books have you read ? Combien de livres avez-vous lus ? Observe. ''" — (1) Past participles of impersonal verbs, or verbs used impersonally, are invariable; as, — The heat lohlch we had, Les chaleurs qu'il a fait. (2) A past participle between two que is invariable; as, — 4 The ansioer lohich I foresaio they La reponse que j'avais prevu qu'on 'Would give you, vous ferait. * The participles attendu, excepte, oui, passe, suppose, vu, non com- pris, y compris, are invariable when they precede the noun (avoir is then understood) ; but they vary when they come after (etre is then understood) ; as, Je puis tout souffrir, excepte votre colere ; Je puis tout souffrir, votre colere exceptee. "^ These observations are not " exceptions." Their object is merely to illustrate the most difficult cases. 44 THE PARTICIPLE. (3) The participle preceded by V is invariable, when r represents a clause of a sentence, or that, or so; as, — The affair is more important than Cette affaire est plus importante I had thought^ que je ne I'avais pense. In this sentence, r means it to he. (4) A past participle having en for its apparent direct object is invariable; as, — I am fond of flowers ; Ihave gath- J'aime beaucoup les fleurs; j'en ered some, ai cueilli. (5) The participles pu, d% voulu, are invariable when an infinitive is understood after them ; as, — / have rendered him all the ser- Je lui ai rendu tous les services vices that I could, que j'ai pu (lui rendre) . (6) As intransitive verbs can have no direct object, their participles used with avoir remain invariable ^^ as, — The three leagues I walked this Les trois lieues que j'ai fait ce morning, matin. The hours I have been running, Les heures que j'ai couru. (7) A past participle followed by an infinitive agrees when the preceding pronoun is its direct object, but re- mains invariable if its direct object is in the infinitive; as, — Poor innocent women! I have Pauvres innocentes! Je les ai seen them dying, vues mourir. Poor innocent loomen ! I have Pauvres innocentes ! Je les ai vu seen them cast into prison, jeter en prison. * According to the Academy, the participles coute and valu, used in their proper meaning, are invariable, as a preposition is then under- stood ; but they are variable when used figuratively. For example, we should write, without agreement : Les mille francs que m'a coute mon voyage ; les mille francs que ce cheval a valu. And with agreement : Les peines que cette affaire m'a coutees ; les gratifications que votre protection m'a values. Grammarians, however, differ on this point. THE PARTICIPLE. 45 As a simple and convenient method of applying the principle stated in (7), observe that a past participle followed by an infinitive agrees whenever the infinitive can be turned iiito a present participle. (8) An exception to this rule is the participle fait. Followed by an infinitive, it is always invariable; as, — He has had her put to deaths II I'a fait mourir. (9) The past participle preceded by an adverb of quan- tity always agrees with the complement of the adverb ; as, — Many errors have slipped into this Beaucoup d'erreurs se sont glis- story^ sees dans cette histoire. (10) The past participle preceded by two nouns united by de agrees with that noun to which it relates. If in- stead of the first noun there is le peu de, the same rule applies ; as, — The great number of faults which Le grand nombre de fautes que / have observed proceed from j'ai remarque provient de votre your inattention, inapplication. A great many mistakes have Une multitude de fautes se sont slipped into your letter^ glissees dans votre lettre. The little attention that he has Le peu d'attention qu'il a montre given shows that he is unwoi*thy fait voir qu'il est indigne de of your interest^ votre interet. {Even) the little attention v'hich Le peu d'attention qu'il a montree he has given loill be useful to lui servira.- him, * The simplest way to ascertain whether le peu is the principal word is to suppress it. If it can be suppressed without altering the whole meaning, then the noun following le peu is the XDrincipal word ; if it cannot, then it is le peu itself. 46 THE ADVEEB. THE ADVERB. Place of Adverbs. EuLE 90. — The simple adverb usually stands after the simple tense ; if the tense is compound, after the auxil- iary; as, — I am always thinfcing of them, Je pense toujours a eux. We have often spoken to him about Nous lui en avons souvent parle. it, Note that: (1) Bien, mal, mieux, jamais, and trop gen- erally precede the infinitive ; as, — He asks me to listen ivell, II me prie de bien ecouter. (2) In French the adverb is never put between the subject and the verb, as it is in English ; as, — I often see him, Je le vols souvent. EuLE 91. — Adverbs compounded of several words are placed after the participle ; as, — / did it hastily, Je I'ai fait a la hate. Note that adverbs of order, and those which denote time in a determinate manner, are placed either before or after the verb; as, — To-day it is fine iveather ; perhaps Aujourd'hui il fait beau ; il pleuvra it will rain to-morroiv, peut-etre demain. / ivant you to go and see the Je veux que d'abord vous alliez physician first, after that, do voir le medecin, ensuite vous as you choose, ferez ce que bon vous semblera. He came to me first, II vint d'abord a moi, or, d'abord il vint a moi. THE ADVERB. 47 Particular Rules on /Ve.* Rule 92. —Ne is commonly used without pas or point : — (1) With the verbs cesser, oser, pouvoir, and, savoir (meaning pouvoir or followed by a conjunction) ;t as, — / am alwaijs scolding you, Je ne cesse de vous gronder. I dare not go there, Je n'ose y aller. / could not do it, Je ne saurais le faire. I do not knoio if he icill come, Je ne sais s'il viendra. (2) Before a subjunctive used negatively, when the first verb is followed by personne, nul, aucun, rien, nullement^ jamais, gu^re, or peu; as, — I see nobody hut loves you, Jene vols personne qui ne vous aime He envies everything he sees, II ne voit rien qui ne lui fasse envie. There are few pleasures that are II y a peu de plaisirs qui ne soient not bought too dear, achetes trop cher. (3) Before the verb of a dependent clause in a sentence interrogative in form but positive in meaning, or before the principal verb if it is preceded by qui; as, — Is there a man loho does not com- Y a-t-il un homme qui ne se plaigne plain of his felloio-creatures P de ses semblables ? Have you a friend ivho is not mine Avez-vous un ami qui ne soit aussi also ? le mien ? Who has not heard all that ? Qui n'a entendu dire tout cela ? * Pas and point must of c6urse be suppressed when there is in the sentence such a negative expression as aucun, nul, personne, guere, ja- mais, nuUeihent, ni . . . ni . . ., plus, rien, ne que (only), and also in such sentences as the following : — He does not see at all, II ne voit goutte. He speaks not a loord, II ne dit mot. I never saw him, Je ne I'ai vu de ma vie. I shall not speak of it to anybody, Je n'en parlerai a ame qui vive, or a qui que ce soit. t Also with bouger, in familiar style. 48 THE ADVEEB. (4) Before the subjunctive used affirmatively, when it is required by a verb or a conjunction implying fear, or by the verbs empicher and prendre garde ]^ as, — We fear he ivill comey Nous craignons qu'il ne vienne. For fear he ivill come, De peur qu'il ne vienne. (5) After the verbs desesperer, douter, disconvenir, and iiier, used negatively and followed by que; as, — I have no doubt hut you are righty Je ne doute pas que vous n'ayez raison. (6) After plus, moins, autre, and autrement, followed by que, and placed before an indicative; as, — He ivrites better than you think, II ecrit mieux que vous ne pensez. But if the first verb is negative or interrogative, or if there is an adverb between que and the verb, the ne is left out (see Eule 24). (7) After a moins que {unless) used affirmatively ; as, — / will go to him unless you your- J'irai le trouver, a moins que vous self go y n'y alliez vous-meme. (8) After si used negatively, and meaning a moins que; as, — I ivill go to Mm, if you yourself J'irai le trouver si voUs n'y allez do not go, vous-meme. (9) After que beginning a sentence, and meaning pour- quoi; as, — Why do you not come ivith us 9 Que ne venez-vous avec nous ? This way of speaking is used only by way of implying a certain degree of reproach or regret. * See Rule 76, second paragraph. THE PREPOSITION. 49 (10) After depuis que, il y a . . . que, followed by a past tense, with a negative meaning ; as, — How have you been since I saw Comment vous etes-vous porte you ? depuis que je ne vous ai vu ? It is three months since I met him i II y a trois mois que je ne I'ai rencontre. Note that if the verb is in the present, pas or point must be used; as, — Now that I do not see him, Depuis que je ne le vois pas. We have not spoken to each other II y a un an que nous ne nous par- for a year, Ions point. (11) After the impersonal verbs il s'en faut que, il s'en faut beaucoup or de beaucoup que, peu s'en faut que, il tient a moi, a lui, etc., and que, used negatively or interroga- tively ;. as, — Little loould make me strike you, II ne tient a rien que je ne vous frappe. He almost named you, Peu s'en est fallu qu'il ne vous nommat. (12) See Eule 101 (2). THE PREPOSITION. De, Eule 93. — (1) It has been said (Enle 32) that de is used after numbers, before the following adjective or participle; as, — One man killed, Un homme de tue. (2) It is also used between quelque chose, rien, quelqu'un. personne, que (interrogative), quoi, quoi que ce soit, quoi que ce ffit, and the following adjective or participle; as, — Is there anything new ? Y a-t-il quelque chose de nouveau ? On a withered trunk nothing good Sur un tronc desseche rien de bon can grow, ne peut naitre. £ 60 THE PREPOSITION. Is anybody ill in your house ? Y a-t-il quelqu'un de malade chez vous? There loas nobody ivounded, II n'y a eu personne de blesse. What is the neivs 9 Qu'y a-t-il de nouveau ? The Translation of To. EuLE 94. — (1) The preposition to as the sign of an infinitive is translated by pour, when it means in order to; as, — »S7ie said so to please yoUj EUe I'a dit pour vous faire plaisir. (2) It is translated by de when the infinitive is the same as of or fiom with a participle ; as, — We had a7i opportunity to see (i.e. Nous avons eu Poccasion de voir of seeing) your uncle y - votre oncle. (3) It is translated by a when the infinitive is the same as in with a participle, and also when the active in- finitive may be changed into the passive infinitive ; as, — He encouraged me to persevere, II m'encouragea a perseverer. A house to let, Une maison a louer. The advice is not to he despised, L'avis n'est pas a mepriser. Depuis, Pendant, Pour (for). EuLE 95. — Depuis marks the beginning of a period of time; as, — From ten o'clock till tioelve, Depuis dix heures jusqu'a midi. I have had this cold for eight days, Je suis enrhume depuis huit jours. Pendant marks the duration, and may often be under- stood; as, — It rained for tioo months, II plut pendant deux mois. I v^orked {for) tioelve hours, • J'ai travaille douze heures. Pour denotes the end ; as, — / am going away for six weeks, Je pars pour six semaines. / have enough paper for three J'ai du papier pour trois mois. months. THE PREPOSITION. 51 Dans and En. Rule 96. — Dans has a precise and determinate sense, while en is vague and undeterminate. In other words, in is expressed by dans before the article, the demonstrative and possessive adjectives, and pronouns, and by en in the other cases ; as, — In the last loar^ Dans la derniere guerre. In time of loar, En temps de guerre. In this garden, Dans ce jardin. I have confidence in you, J"ai confiance en vous. EuLE 97. — When used to express time, dans marks the epoch, and en the duration ; as, — He icill arrive in three daijs {when II arrivera dans trois jours. three days have elapsed), It will take him three days to ar- II arrivera en trois jours. rive, '^A^ X^ULE 98. — /?i, placed before names of towns, is trans- lated by a; as, — He died in London, II est mort a Londres. In, placed before names of countries, is translated by en;^ as, — Iivas horn in France, Je suis ne en France. He lives in Italy, II demeure en Italie. 4 Should the name of a country be accompanied by an adjective or any attribute, dans must be used; as, — I lived three years in North Amei'- J'ai demeure trois ans dans ica, I'Amerique du Nord. * But if the name of the country is masculine or plural then au or aux is used ; as, etre or aller au Mexique, au Chili, aux Etats Unis. A la is used before the names of a few islands ; as, a la Jamaique, a la Marti- nique, a la Guadeloupe. 52 THE CONJUNCTION. From, EuLE 99. — From (a person's house) is translated by de chez; as, — We come from our uncle's, Nous venons de chez notre oncle. From (a person) is translated by de la part de ; as, — Go from me to your mother' Sf Allez de ma part chez madame votre mere. Repetition of Prepositions. EuLE 100. — Prepositions are generally repeated before each noun, unless the different nouns are synonymous ; as,— The same prejudices are to be On trouve les memes prejuges en found in Europe, Asia, Africa, Europe, en Asie, en Afrique, et a7id even in America, jusqu'en Amerique. Note that the prepositions a, de, and en are always repeated. ^ THE CONJUNCTION. Que. EuLE 101. — (1) Que is often used in place of the con- junctions afin que, a moins que, avant que, aussitdt que, cependant, comme, de orainte que, de peur que, depuis que, d^s que, de ce que, jusqu'a ce que, paroe que, quand, quoi- que, sans que, soit que ; as, — Come {here) lohile I speak to you, Venez, que je vous parle. Not a day passes but it rains. Pas un jour ne se passe qu'il ne pleuve. 1 (2) Ne is required before the following verb when que stands for a moins que, avant que, de peur que, de crainte THE CONJUNCTION. 63 que, depuis que (or il y a . . . que), sans que, jusqu'i ce que; as, — / will not set out till he arrives, Je ne partirai pas qu'il n'arrive. Observe that this form of expression is to be used only when the first clause of the sentence is negative. Rule 102. — Que is also used for lioiv, how much, hoiv many, and expresses wonder, irony, indignation. The adjective following it must be translated without tr^s, bien, or fort; as, — Hoio (very) unhappy that woman Que cette femme a I'air mal- looks ! heureux ! The noun, adjective, or adverb following hoiv, hoio much, how many, is often put after the verb in French ; as, — What poioer virtue has over the Que la vertu a de pouvoir sur les most ferocious minds ! ames les plus feroces ! Rule 103. — When the conjunction and with a verb follows the verbs to go, to come, to run, the French omit the conjunction; as, — Go and tell him, Allez lui dire. Will you come and take a walk Voulez-vous venir faire un tour ivith me ? avec moi ? Run and fetch my spectacles, Courez me chercher mes lunettes. II. EXERCISES ON THE PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX. [Superior figures refer to the preceding rules.] (Rules 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.) 1. La vertu, dit Platon, c'est la ressemblance a Dieu par la justice, la saintete et la sagesse, dans la mesure de nos forces. 2. II faut tou jours agir avec franchise, si Ton veut etre sincerement heureux. 3. Sujets, amis, parents, tout Pa trahi. 4. Quand j'etais en pension, j^avais deux francs cinquante centimes par semaine pour mes menus plaisirs. 5. Combien se vendent^^ les cerises et les fraises dans ce pays ? 6. Les cerises se vendent dix centimes le demi-kilo, et les fraises vingt' centimes. 7. IS'e m'avez-YOus pas dit que M. votre pere est medecin ? 8. Non, monsieur, il est avocat, mais il a fait des etudes de medecine. 9. Quelle triste matinee! 10. ^^Les hommes sont egaux; ce n'est point la naissance, C'est la seule vertu qui fait leur difference." — Voltaire. 11. "Patience et longueur de temps Pont plus que force ni que rage.'' — La Fontaine. 54 EXERCISES. 55 2. prayer, priere (f.). to resolve, resoudre. reproach, reproche (m.). contemporary , contemporain. to move, emouvoir. to earn, gagner. contentment, contentement (m.). cruelty, cruaute (f.). riches, richesses (f.). in the sight of, aux yeux de. 1. The wise (man) prefers virtue to beauty. 2. His- tory is the portrait of men and times. 3. Spanish is easy, but German is difficult. 4. Neither prayers nor reproaches could '^ move him. 5. Contentment is better than {passe) riches. 6. In ^ time of war the savages of xlmerica are armed with^^ tomahawks. 7. When we arrived from Holland, we resolved to go to Ireland. 8. Louis the Eighteenth/'^ king of France, and George the Fourth ^ of England were contemporaries. 9. He is a physician, and his brother a grocer. 10. It is almost impossible to hide envy, malice, cruelty, avarice, and anger. 11. Glory, riches, genius, honors, are nothing in the sight of God. 12. Centurions and soldiers, both murmured^- against the general's orders. 13. Poverty is no crime. 14. Alexanders and Caesars are always fatal to the world. 15. What a fine coat you have ! 16. In France, St. Xicholas' day is the fete of the boys, and St. Catherine's day that of girls. 17. The gentle- man ^ you see is a Dutchman. 18. The AtJialie of Eacine is the masterpiece of the^French theatre. 3. (Rules 7, 8.) 1. Je veux a la campagne du petit-lait, de bon potage. 2. J'ai vu dans ce musee des bas-reliefs magnifiques. 3. Ce sont des gens de bien ; ce sont de braves, d'excel- lentes gens. 4. AUez-vous-en tons, je ne veux pas de 56 EXERCISES. bruit chez moi. 5. Je ne vols dans sa conduite que de ces inegalites auxquelles les femmes les mieux nees sont le plus sujettes. 6. Dans les traductions, il n'est guere possible de rendre un vers par un vers, lorsque cette precision est le plus desirable. 7. Les Francs, peuple sauvage, ne vivaient que de legumes, de fruits, de racines et des animaux qu'ils avaient pris a la chasse. 8. Les grands ont des plaisirs, le peuple a de la joie. 9. ^^C'est de sang qu'ils ont soif, c'est du sang qu'ils demandent.'^ — Delille. 10. " II est guinde sans cesse, et dans tons ses propos On voit qu'il se travaille a dire des bons mots.'' — MOLIERE. 11. ^^Entre nos ennemis Les plus a craindre sont souvent les plus i^etits.'' — La Fontaine. 4. to dry up, dessecher. numerous, nombreux. osti'ich, antrache (f.).^ to itness, temoin. to swalloio, avaler. praise, louange (f.), eloge (m.). to he enough for (p.^) , suffire a. foolishly, follement. * We give below the shortest and most satisfactory rule yet given for mastering the gender of French nouns. It is due to M. Albites,.formerly teacher of French in Birmingham. Note that the rule does not apply to nouns the gender of which is evident. Nouns having the following terminations are feminine : — ale, ole, ule ; rre, lie, ie, or ie; be, ce, de; se, te, te ; (as, cathedrale, ecole, nature, faveur, terre, beaute, marche, maison). Nouns not having these terminations are masculine ; as, port, cheval, cafe, crime, village. There are, of course, exceptions to the rule, but, according to M. Albites, it holds good in ninety-nine cases out of one hundred. ^ p. = iDerson; th. = thing. ure, ere, eur ; ee, ue, ion; fe, ne, pe ; ve. he, aison ; terre, conversation, clemence, EXERCISES. 57 change, monnaie (f.). hoio it is, comment cela se fait. to beg one's pardon, demander counsel, cqvlsq\\s {in. ^\.). pardon a (p.)- 1. There are winds which pass over tlie country and dry up plants. 2. He says^ he has no money, but don't believe him. 3. Ostriches often ^ swallow iron, copper, stones, glass, and Avood. 4. Bread and water will be enough for me. 5. In order to^^ write, one must have paper and ink. 6. In order to write well, one must have good paper and good ink. 7. He who has numerous wit- nesses of his death, dies with courage. 8. I have made use of the fine books you gave me. 9. There are praises which blame, and reproaches that praise. 10. Do not give her any money, she would go and^^^ spend it foolishly. 11. He has always good reasons to give us. 12. Did you not say that you had some people "^ at your house to-night? 13. I hope you have some change ? 14. I beg your pardon, sir, I have none. 15. I don't know how it is, I never have any change. 16. It is this thought that t torments her the most. 17. Do not give your friend the most agreeable counsel, but the most useful. 5. (Rules 9, 10, 11, 12, 13.) 1. Cette jeune fille va tons les dimanches a la grand'- messe avec sa grand'mere et ses deux grand'peres.l * Translate peo^^Ze by monde when it means company. ^ When yon have to translate the relative that or lohich, put qui if that or ichich is next the verb in English, and que if it is separated from the verb by one or more words. Exception : when ivhich is pre- ceded by a preposition, translate it according to Rule 53. i AYith some feminine nouns in daily use, the e mute of grande is sup- pressed and an apostrophe is put instead. Grand' is then invariable; so we say, des grand'rues, des grand'messes, etc. 58 EXERCISES. 2. Presque tons les tableaux de ce peintre sont des chefs- d'oeuvre. 3. Allez dans la prairie, et vous ponrrez admirer a la fois mille arcs-en-ciel peints snr chaque gontte de rosee. 4. Les vers a sole sont si communs a Tonquin que la sole n'y est pas plus cliere que le coton. 0. Allez an marclie an ble, vous y verrez rhomme au manteau noir qui demeure pres de la maison de campagne de M. votre pere. 6. Ceux qui viennent interrompre des tete-a-tete ennuyeux sont toujours les bienvenus. 7. Une infinite de jeunes gens se perdent parce qu'ils frequentent de mauvaises societes. 8. La plupart"^ croient que le bonheur est dans la ricliesse ; ils se troinpent. 9. Quel- ques sages ont cette opinion, le reste des homines est de mon avis. 10. '' Le reste pour son Dieu montre un oubli fatal."' — Racine. 11. " La moitie des humains rit aux depens de Tautre.'' — Destouches. 12. '' Ciel ! quel pompeux amas d'esclaves a genoux Est aux pieds de ce roi qui les fait trembler tons ! '' — Voltaire. 6. mco^le, marbre (m.) . prefecture, \ ^^lef-lieu (m.) . mill, moulin (m.). ' ^ de prefecture. to he loest from, etre a I'ouest de. mastei^piece , chef-d'ceuvre (m.)- to defeat, battre, defaire. to rear, elever. crowd, foule (f.). raulherrrij bush, murier (m.). to impede, retarder. veil, voile (m.)- annexation, einnexion. Turkeij , Tmqnie (f.). Savoy, Savoie (f.). fig, figue (f.). 1. Has your servant washed the marble table ? 2. "We bought a coffee-mill yesterday, which ^^ goes very well. * The verb is put in the plural after la plupart used without comple- ment, and in the singular after le reste, whatever be its complement. EXERCISES. 59 3. There are two water mills on that farm. 4. Have you seen my silk gown and my gold watch? 5. The forest of the Ardennes is west from the Luxemburg province. 6. The army of the infidels was entirely defeated. 7. The crowd of carriages impeded our march. 8. The annexa- tion of Savoy and Nice has given France three new prefectures. 9. Le Cicl and Athalie are dramatic master- pieces. 10. In warm countries silk-worms are reared on mulberry bushes. 11. Most men recollect the services they render, better than those they receive. 12. Most people desire old age, and complain when they have reached ^'-^ it. 13. The troop of soldiers of which they have spoken to you, has entered ^^ into the village and plundered ^^ it. 14. Why has not your sister a velvet bonnet? 15. She has bought a silk gown and a lace veil. 16. The Clyde-built steam-boats are famous over all the world. 17. The English import a great quantity of Malta oranges and Turkey figs. 18. The family is in the country; they will not come back before the 10th of next month. (Rules 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22.) 1. Sur le continent presque toutes les horloges pub- liques sonnent les quarts et les demies. 2. La demie est- elle sonnee? 3. Les montagnards qui ont en toutes saisons les jambes nues, marchent rarement nu-tete.^ 4. Vous n'en avez pris qu'une demi-livre, mais moi j'en ai achete une livre et demie. 5. Les Polonais ne trou- vent pas Phuile bonne si^-^^^ elle ne sent fort. 6. Xeron * Demi and nu are variable when following the noun, and invari- able when preceding it. 60 EXERCISES. etait anssi odieux aiix senateurs et aux simples citoyens qu'il etait cruel en vers eux. 7. II est necessaire a Pliomme de travailler et de prendre de Pexercice et du repos. 8. II est beau de nionrir pour la defense de son pays. 9. Vous avez deux fils et deux fiUes tres-spirituels et tres-jolis. 10. ^-11 me semble deja que ces murs, que ces voutes^ Sont prets a m'accuser.^^— Racine. 11. " Le f er, le bandeau, la flamme est toute prete.^^ — Racine. 12. " Que ^°- d'autres a ma place auraient pu rester court! '^ — C. Delavigne. 8. to shoiv, montrer, faire voir. ivholesome, sain. Fenelon, Fenelon. holly, honx (jn.). by turns, tour a tour. edged, borde. to astonish, etonner. spine, epine (f.). loud, haut. deception, imposture (f.). to stop, s'arreter. guinea, guinee (f.). misconduct, mauvaise conduite, at once, tout de suite. 1. His father and mother are dead. 2. Fenelon has shown by turns astonishing virtue or genius. 3. These girls speak too loud. 4. She stopped short. 5. That flower smells bad. 6. A good king often loses, by the misconduct of his ministerSj the affection of his best subjects. 7. Have you never read any Freiicli poem ? 8. Bitter fruits are often the most wholesome. 9. The green leaves of the holly are edged with spines. 10. An affected simplicity is a delicate deception. 11. I like the simple and cordial manners of the Scotch. 12. I am fatigued with running. 13. Voltaire was greedy of praise, and insatiable of glory. 14. That is easy to say, but difficult to do. 15. For half a guinea, he walked barefooted for an hour and a half. 16. She is a good, EXERCISES. 61 amiable, and virtuous woman. 17. It is necessary to go there at once. 18. He respects and obeys his uncle. 9. (Rules 23, 24, 25, 26.) Ic Plus un honime a de vrai nierite, x^lus il Papplaudit dans les autres. 2. Qu'il ne Use pas plus, mais qu'il lise mieux qu'il ne fait. 3. II assure qu'il ferai^ bieii un kilometre en cinq minutes, mais cela est bien plus facile a dire qu'a faire. 4. Mon voyage m'a coute beaucoup plus cher que je ne m^ attendais. 5. Moins on pense, plus on parle. 6. Vous etes plus grand que moi de toute la tete. 7. Je voudrais bien savoir si elle se porte mieux que quand elle etait en Hollande. 8. Etes-vous plus savant qu'il Petait? 9. C'est tout autre chose que je ne croyais. 10. Plus vous kii ferez de reproches, moins il travaillera ; le mieux est de ne lui rieii dire. 11. Ce que vous me dites de mon frere me fait bien plaisir, il s'est comporte beaucoup mieux que je ne Taurais cru. 12. '^ Je vous entends ici mieux que vous ne pensez." — Racine. 10. obliging, obligeant. care, souci (m.). it is better (imp.), il vaut mieux. artless, naif. / had rather^ j'aimerais mieux.^ to endure, supporter. to do a service, rendre service a. to get rid of, se defaire de. 1. He is older than you by three years, and taller by a whole head. 2. You are the most obliging man in the town. 3. He has gained this year more than a thousand pounds. 4. It is better ^ to suffer than to act * Although valoir mieux and aimer mieux require no preposition after them, yet, by exception, than following them is translated by que de before an infinitive. 62 EXERCISES. unjustly. 5. I had rather die than do it. 6. That girl speaks better than she writes. 7. I am better than when I was in France. 8. The more difficult a 'thing is, the more honorable it is. 9. Eussia is the greatest empire in the world. 10. The poorer people are, the fewer cares they have. 11. His sister is the prettiest girl in the town. 12. France has more than five hundred thousand soldiers. 13. The more we ^'^ read the fables of the good and artless La Fontaine, the more we are convinced that they are the manual of a man of taste. 14. It is more difficult to endure misfortune than to get rid of it. 15. Fenelon said it was better to prevent evil than to be obliged to punish it. 16. The more difficult a thing is, the more attention we^^ must give to it. 17. Since the invention of gunpowder, battles are less bloody than they were. 18. I have not seen him for more than two years. 11. (Rules 27, 28, 29, 30.) 1. J^ai mal aux dents. 2. J'y ai mal aussi. 3. Les negres ont la tete ronde, le nez epate et le front saillant. 4. Lorsque Charles XII regut le coup qui termina dans un instant ses exploits et sa vie, il porta la main sur son . epee. 5. Je soaffre a mon genou."^ 6. Toute fiere qu'elle est, il lui a fallu boire Paffront. 7. Nous avons fait prisonniers quelque mille hommes et sommes restes maitres du champ de bataille. 8. Quelle que soit votre impatience et quelque ennuyeuses que soient ces de- marches, il faut qu'elles se fassent. 9. La valeur, * The possessive mon, ton, son, etc., may be used when speaking of an habitual pain EXERCISES. * 63 tout lieroique qii'elle est, ne suffit pas, a clit Massillon, pour faire cles heros. 10. On I'a trouvee tout en pleurs. 11. " Eome n'est plus dans Eome, elle est toute ou je suis." — CORNEILLE. 12. '^ Un tout petit enfant demande qu'on Tassiste, En soufflant dans ses mains toutes rouges de froid." — A. GUIRAUD. 12. ball, boulet (m.). f^ j^^^^ J entendre dire. to take of, -i importer. ' ^ apprendre. to shoot off, f the back, le dos. to sprain, demettre. perishable, perissable. wrist, poignet (m.). wet, mouille. gout, goutte (f.). to boast, se vanter de. to make mistakes, se tromper. to stand by, se tenir pres de. to leave, quitter. ashes, cendres (f. pi.). to split, fendre. shepherd, berger. 1. My brother broke his leg yesterday. 2. A cannon ball took off his arm. 3. She has sprained her wrist. 4. His gout has not left him. 5. Do not speak so loud, you split my head. 6. Your hands are always cold, in summer as in winter. 7. Their hands were warm, but their feet w^ere cold. 8. Have you heard that she has lost her reason ? 9. My back is very sore to-day. 10. Whatever your fortune is, it is perishable. 11. My sister is quite wet. 12. Her face is quite scorched. 13. However "^ eminent your talents may be, do not boast of them. 14. However prudently men act, they always * The final e of quelque (when written in one word) is never elided — quelque autre, quelque aimable, quelque enfant. But, when it is combined with un, they form a single word, and are written quelqu'un, quelqu'une, quelques-uns, quelques-unes. For the suppression of the vowel e, see Note, page 57. 64 EXERCISES. run the risk of making mistakes. 15. Whatever your virtues are, do not believe yourself better than others. 16. In the last engagement our general lost his right leg. 17. My brother was wounded in his shoulder, and I, who stood by him, had my arm taken off. 18. The ashes of the shepherd and of the king are alike. 13. (Rules 31, 32, 33.) 1. Le froid fut tres-grand en 1789. 2. II y a en France 35,000,000 d^habitants. 3. L'armee de Sesostris, com- posee de 600,000 hommes de pied, de 24,000 chevaux et de 27,000 chars, etait commandee par 1700 officiers choisis parmi les compagnons de son enfance. 4. L'homme ne vit pas aujourd'hui au-dela de 80 ans; il vivait autrefois plus de 300 ans. 5. Les premiers Chretiens faisaient enterrer avec eux le livre des Evangiles. 6. De quel cote se trouve le numero 200 ? 7. On fait par le chemin de fer plus de trente milles par heure. 8. Vous ap- prendrez cent lignes par coeur pour vendredi. 9. Napo- leon, Chateaubriand et ]\P'^ de Stael naquirent en 1769. 10. Dans la bataille il y eut 600 hommes de tues et 3000 de blesses. 11. Les debris du colosse de Ehodes furent vendus a un marchand juif qui en eut la charge de 200 chameaux. 12. L'airain de ce colosse montait encore, 880 ans apres sa chute, a 720,000 livres ou a 7200 quintaux. 14. Lacedsemon, Lacedemone (f.). the Bastile, la Bastille. Athens, Athenes (f.)- engineer, ingenieur. to found, fonder. was born, naquit. to declcu^e war against, declarer Troy, Txoie (f.)- la guerre a. to intend, avoir I'intention de ; to he compared, a comparer. compter. EXERCISES. 65 1. You will receive three hundred and ^ eighty francs to-morrow.^ 2. There are twenty-five pupils in this class. 3. Lacedaemon was built one ' thousand five hundred and sixteen years before Christ. 4. Athens was founded one thousand five hundred and eighty-two years before Christ. 5. In the year one thousand ^ seven hundred and fifty-five^ ^ England declared war against France. 6. Louis the Fourteenth was a great warrior ; but he was not to be compared to Francis the First nor to Charles the Twelfth. 7. The Bastile was taken by the people on " the fourteenth of Jul}^, seventeen hundred and eighty-nine. 8. They arrived in Paris on the first of June, and they left on the tenth. 9. There are ten boxes sent, and three left. 10. Date your letter May the eleventh. 11. Marshal^ Vauban, the greatest engineer who^" ever lived, was born in sixteen hun- dred and three. 12. He fortified three hundred old towns. 13. He was present at one hundred and forty engagements. 14. This rule is to be found on the hundred and eightieth page. 15. It was about the year tvfo thousand seven hundred and ninety-six of the crea- tion that Troy was taken and destroyed by the Greeks. 16. I intend to go to Edinburgh on the first or the third * The conjunction et is used in only six numbers: 21 (vingt-et-un), 31, 41, 51, 61, and 71. < ^ Neither a nor one are expressed before mille and cent. ^ Mille {thousand) is written mil in reckoning the years of the Christian era. § The hyphen is used to connect the different parts of a French number only from 17 to 99. " The word on used before days and dates is neve?' translated in French. ^ The article le, la, les, is used in French before nouns of title or dignity, when these are not used adjectively ; as, Le marechal Vauban, le docteur J., etc. F 66 EXERCISES. of next month. 17. They were only three hundred and twenty, and in spite of their inferiority they attacked and beat the enemy. 18. Have you begun your letter ? There are only three lines written. 15. (Rule 34.) 1. Voyez que de beaux livres on m'a donnes ! mais aussi j'ai Men travaille pour les gagner. 2. Si seulement elle me faisait voir la lettre que son frere lui a ecrite, je saurais ce qu'il faut repondre. 3. Finissez donc,"^ vous lui faites mal. 4. lis sont trop fiers pour m'ecrire apres Taffront que je leur ai fait. 5. Je ne le regrette pas, ils ne m'ont jamais fait que de la peine. 6. Si vous ne leur ecrivez pas, ou si du moins vous ne passez pas chez eux, ils ne voudront plus vous voir. 7. Je suis force, Mon- sieur, de m'adresser a vous, puisque je ne puis avoir recours a elle. 8. 'Ne lui parlez jamais de moi, elle me deteste, et je le lui rends bien. 9. Quand on sent, dit Vauvenargues, qu'on n'a pas de quoi se faire estimer de quelqu'un, on est bien pres de le hair. 10. Je vous donnerai un conseil salutaire, et, pour recompense, je ne vous demande que le secret. 11. ^^Dissipe tes douleurs, Et ne me trouble pas par ces indignes pleurs." — BOILEAU. 12. " Je vous Pai deja dit, aimez qu'on vous censure; Mais ne vous rendez pas des qu'unsot vous reprend." — BOILEAU. * Done is often used, especiaUy after an imperative, to give more energy to the expression, to mark some impatience, etc. EXERCISES. 67 16. thimble, de (m.)- to come and meet, venir au-devant de. loorJc-box, boite a ouvrage (f .)• to be quite dark,iaire tout afait nuit. to leave it to, s'en remettre a. to apply to (p.), s'adresser a; avoir to lay it to, s'en prendre a. recours a. to appeal to, en appeler a. to succeed {to be successful) , reussir. to trust (p.), se fier a. to inquire for, demander (p.). to be out, etre sorti. 1. She gave me a silver thimble, and I gave her a work-box. 2. Do you not speak to him when yon meet him? 3. Ko, my mother has forbidden me to speak to him. 4. Your brother wrote to yon three months ago ; have yon not yet replied to him ? 5. Did yon think of her when yon wrote to John? 6. Do not go with him ; yon wonld arrive after ns. 7. That does not belong to yon, it belongs to me. 8. He leaves it to me. 9. She lays it to ns. 10. I was coming to yon when they obliged me to go to her. 11. I appeal to them. 12. I speak to him, and not to them. 13. Yon have deceived me, I shall not trnst yon any more. 14. Yon shonld^^ come and meet ns before it is qnite dark. 15. If yon apply to him yon will not sncceed. 16. He inquired for me, but he was told^^ that I was out. 17. I wonder if she will come to me when she '^ sees me. 18. Yon are hurting my leg. 17. (Rule 35.) 1. Avez-vons qnelqnes verites a faire entendre anx rois ne les lenr dites j)as ; vons epronveriez bientot les effets de lenr courronx. 2. Elle ne vons Panrait pas ecri±, 3^92(8) gi^g n'avait crn vons etre ntile. 3. Ma soenr anrait vonln qne je Ini pretasse les denx livres dont vons 68 EXERCISES. m'avez fait cadean. 4. Je ne les Ini clonnerai pas, car elle ne me les rendrait jamais. 5. La derniere fois que j'ai eu le plaisir de vous voir, voiis avez promis de m'aider de vos conseils, ne vous le rappelez-vous pas ? 6. Je lui enverrai ce paquet sans qu'il ait besoin de me le demander. 7. Faites-moi le plaisir de dire a M""® votre mere que je compte aller lui presenter mes respects un de ces jours. 8. Veuillez m'entendre, je vous en supplie ; ne me ren- voyez pas ainsi a lui ; il se fait un jeu de mes prieres. 9. Est-ce que vous n'avez pas vu le livre que je lui ai prete ? 10. Pardon, Monsieur, elle me I'a fait voir liier matin. 11. Auriez-vous la bonte de me preter cet album jusqu'a demain soir? j'aurai soin de vous le renvoyer. 12. ^-Manger Therbe d'autrui! quel crime abominable! Eien que la mort n'etait capable D'expier son forfait. On le lui fit Men voir.'' — La Fontaine. 18. to bring (here), apporter. to have a fancy for, avoir du gout pour. to confess, avouer. ivithout ceasing, sans cesse. 1. If you had asked it from me, I should have given it to you with pleasure. 2. I shall not speak to him,, but I shall write him a long letter. 3. Do not give it to her ; keep it for yourself. 4. They would "^ hot show them to us. 5. You must bring it to them. 6. They must not say so. 7. That box is very pretty; I don't think he will give it to us. 8. He intends to ask you (for) your flowers ; give them to him. 9. Do not give them to him. 10. Keep them for me. 11. Believe me; confess your fault to me. 12. Do not repeat that to him. 13. I should never have given it to her, if she had not asked EXERCISES. 69 me for it. 14. Here is some good cloth which is not very dear ; I shall give it to yon, if yon will lend me three hnndred and seventy francs. 15. Please lend me yonr pencil ; I shall retnrn it to yon to-morrow. 16. They have been songht for everywhere, and have not been found. 17. I no longer have a fancy for these books ; put them elsewhere. 18. I do not understand you; you do it^ undo it^ and do it again without ceasing. 19. (Rules 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43.) 1. Fais-leur"^ observer que rien ne contribue plus a Peconomie et a la proprete que de tenir chaque chose a * AVhen faire is followed by an infinitive, it must be accompanied by the pronoun lui, leur, if the infinitive has a direct object ; as, — I caused him to drink a glass of loine, Je lui ai fait boire un verre de vin. They pi'ocured employment for him, On lui fit obtenir un emploi. But if the infinitive has no direct object, put le, la, les, instead of lui, leur; as, — They made him consent to that On le fit consentir a cette de- request, mande. When, instead of a pronoun placed before faire, there is a noun placed after, put a in the cases which would require lui, leur, and no preposition in the cases which would require le, la, les ; as, — I caused that man to drink^ a J'ai fait boire un verre de vin a glass of wine, cet homme. I shall make that man consent to Je ferai consentir cet homme a that request, cette demande. Cet homme is, in the first case, indirect object of faire boire ; in the second, direct object of faire consentir. A is also used after some other French locutions which would require the accusative in English, such as ouir dire, entendre dire, voir faire, voir donner, etc. ; as, — I heard your brother say that you J'ai entendu dire a votre frere que ivould come, vous viendriez. 70 EXERCISES. sa place. 2. N^accordez pas toute votre attention a cet enfant ; partagez-la entre tons. 3. Nous aimons mieux voir ceux a qui nous faisons du bien que ceux qui nous en font. 4. Ne craignez pas de multiplier vos bienfaits, inais ne les reprochez jamais, si vous voulez en gouter le fruit. 5. Vous decidez sans examen qu'il a eu tort de tenter cette entreprise ; et je crois, moi, qu'il en retirera honneur et profit. 6. Je recois votre lettre, et je me hate d'y repondre. 7. Quant a la raison que vous m^alleguez, je m'y rends. 8. Je vous laisserai ce livre pour quinze francs; il m'en a coiite vingt. 9. Je vous recommande encore ce jeune homme, et tachez de vous occuper de lui plus activement que vous ne vous en etes occupe jusqu'a present. 10. Si vos amis commettent des fautes graves, reprochez-les-leur franchement. 11. ^^La fortune a son prix; Pimprudent en abuse, L^hypocrite en medit, et I'honnete homme en use.'' — Delille. 12. " La, regardez-moi la durant cet entretien, Et jusqu'au moindre mot imprimez4e-vous bien." — MOLIERE. 20. plate, assiette (f.). to devote, consacrer. for, (conj.), car. Jit for, propre a. . to keep away, s'eloigner; se tenir to do loithout, se passer de. eloigne. to bring hack, ramener. spirited, diXdLQnt. /rame, cadre (m.). to go near, s'approcher de. to bring {to take)y porter. 1. Bring me a clean plate, for this is dirty. 2. This road is very dangerous ; keep away from it. 3. You have got fine cloth ; give me some. 4. Buy some, if you wish to have it. 5. That horse is too spirited, don't go nea,r it. 6. This science is very important, I shall devote all my EXERCISES. 71 time to it. 7. You know this man, do you not trust him ? 8. Yes, I do trust him. 9. He asked me (for) money, but I shall not lend him any. 10. It is a mis- fortune ; don't think of it any more. 11. He does not like his business; he is not fit for it. 12. AYhen a man is dead, he is no longer thought of. 13. When I have wine, I drink some. 14. When I have none, I easily do without it. 15. If you go to Edinburgh, I go there also. 16. Go there, and do not forget to bring back your brother. 17. This picture is good; put a frame to it. 18. When^^ you are in the country, if you ha..ve need of money, I shall bring you some there. 21. (Rules 44, 45, 46, 47.) 1. Chacun ne songe qu'a soi. 2. Ceux qui sont amis de tout le monde ne le sont de personne. 3. Pourquoi les riches sont-ils si durs envers les pauvres ? C'est qu'ils n'ont pas peur de le devenir. 4. Le dieu lui repondit : Les tiens cesseront de regner quand un etranger entrera dans ton ile pour y faire regner les lois. 5. C'est un de vos parents qui a recu la pension qu'un de mes freres a' perdue I'annee derniere. 6. II depend tou jours de soi d'agir honorablement. 7."^ Vous dites que ce jeune homme aime beaucoup son frere ; detrompez-A^ous, il n'aime que soi. 8. Leur fille est morte a la campagne il y a deux ans, chez un de nos amis. 9. ^' Qui ne songe qu'a soi quand la fortune est bonne Dans le malheur n'a point d'amis."— Florian. 10. ^^ J'aime done sa victoire, et je le puis sans crime." — CORNEILLE. 72 EXEHCISES. 11. ^^11 les prend pour des rois. — Vous ne vous trompez pas; lis le sont; dit Louis, sans en avoir le titre/'— Voltaire. 12. ^^On peut tou jours trouver plus malheureux que soi." — La Fontaine. 22. to he angry at or loith (p.), etre to live together on good terms, fiche contre ; en vouloir a. etre bien ensemble. populous, ^o^uIqmx. temper, caract ere (m.). 1. Why are you angry with him ? he loves you, he honors you, he respects you. 2. He beseeches and conjures me to go and^^^ see him. 3. Are you the mistress ? Yes, I am. 4. She is happy ; at least she looks so. 5. Friends, are you ready to go ? Yes, we are. 6. And you, madam, are you ready ? No, I am not. 7. This town is more populous than ^^ she thinks. 8. This gentleman wishes me to go,'^ and you don't. 9. Our friends are wealthy, but we are not ; you ought to know it. 10. When one is sick, he is best at home. 11. This table is ours, and not yours. 12. I have found, to-day, a handkerchief of yours among mine. 13. A handkerchief of mine, you say ? it is not mine, it is your friend's. 14. A sister of his is dead. 15. Is it your temper or hers that hinders you from living together on good terms ? 16. She went, a few days ago, to see a child of hers. 17. Your boots are clean, but his and mine are not. 18. Where have they put those papers of hers ? 23. (Rule 48.) 1. Je ne puis vous rien promettre ; ce seront les cir- constances qui decideront. 2. Chez eux ces hommes sont des despotes, a la cour ce sont des valets. 3. Platon EXERCISES. 73 disait de riiomme que c'etait un animal a^^ deux jambes sans plumes. 4. Bien loin d'etre des demi-dieux, ce ne sont pas meme des hommes. 5. C'est se tromper gros- sierement que de ^ penser que les richesses nous rendent heureux. 6. C'est un bien aimable gaiQon que votre frere. 7. C'est ce qui s'appelle agir en ami. 8. C'est un tresor qu'un ami. 9. Ce qui importe a tout homme, c'est de remplir ses devoirs sur la terre. 10. ^^Ce que je sais le mieux^ c'est mon commencement." — Racine. 11. '^ Le plaisir des bons coeurs, c'est la reconnaissance." — La Harpe. 12. " La vie est un depot confie par le ciel ; Oser en disposer, c'est etre criminel." — Gresset. 24. carriage, voiture (f.). « good fellow, un bon enfant, un to stop the loay, fermer le passage. bon gargon. to conquer {to take possession of), to meet vnth, rencontrer. conquerir. to contribute, contribuer. to conquer (to defeat), vaincre, to make a fool of , se moquei de. battre. 1. It is the king's carriages which stop the way. 2. It is not youj it is not we, that can judge them. 3. This is the best book I ever read.'"'' 4. He is a very learned man. 5. They are ver;^ respectable people. 6. Can one behave so? It is unworthy of a man. 7. It is (a) shameful (thing) to betray* truth. 8. It is to them I have applied. 9. It is (a) glorious (thing) to conquer one's enemies. 10. To think much is to live. 11. They are the best fellows I ever met with. 12. Is it your * After c'est we put que de before an infinitive, and que before a noun. 74 EXERCISES. friends that I am to see to-morrow ? 13. AVhat contrib- utes most to liealth is temperance. 14. It is useless to speak to her; she wilH^ not do it. 15. A name, famous too soou, is a very heavy burden. 16. What pleases me most is that you are coming to see me. 17. What grieves him most is that you make a fool of him. 18. Is it to him that they have given so much praise ? 25. (Rules 49, 50, 51.) 1. Qu'est-ce qui vous empeche de venir avec nous ? 2. Est-ce que par hasard vous avez peur de rencontrer votre frere ? 3. Qu'est-ce qu'il vous a fait ? 1. A quoi pensez-vous done ? 5. De qui vous moquez-vous ? 6. Est-ce que vous parlez serieusement ? 7. N'est-ce pas que vous viendrez avec nous ? 8. II me semble que vous etes bien poltron ? de quoi ou de qui avez-vous peur ? 9. Est-ce que c'est de moi, ou de votre soeur, ou de votre ombre ? 10. ^-La source tombait du rocher, Goutte a goutte, a la mer affreuse. L'Ocean, fatal au nocher, Lui dit : ' Que me veux-tu, pleureuse ? 11. ^^^ Je suis la tempete et Peffroi; Je finis ou le ciel commence. Est-ce que j'ai besoin de toi, Petite^ moi qui suis Pimmense ? ^ 12. " La source dit au gouffre amer : ' Je te donne^ sans bruit ni gloire, Ce qui te manque, o vaste mer, Une goutte d'eau qu'on pent boire ! ' " — Victor Hugo EXERCISES. 75 26. to care about, se soucier de. to hurt, faire mal a. to knock, frapper. to frighten (p.), faire peur a. to mean, vouloir dire. to complain ofy se plaindre de. 1. Who told you so ? 2. To whom are you speaking ? 3. Who will do that for me ? 4. Who cares about it ? 5. Who knocks? 6. Whom did I offend? 7. Who hurt that child ? 8. Who is living there ? 9. What =^ do you say ? 10. What is he going to do ? 11. What prevented you from going? 12. What is the matter with your mamma ? ^ 13. What does he mean ? 14. Should such a thing happen,! what would you do ? 15. Whom * Different ways of translating lohat : — (1) When placed before a noun, it is translated by quel, quelle, quels, quelles ; as, — I don't know lohat hook you mean, Je ne sais de quel livre vous voulez parler. What hook do you mean ? De quel livre voulez-vous parler? (2) When placed before a verb, used affirmatively or negatively (but not interrogatively) , it is translated by ce qui or ce que ; by ce qui if what is, in English, next the verb ; by ce que in every other case ; as, — What vexes me, is that he will not Ce qui me fache, c'est qu'il ne study, veut pas etudier. Do you hear lohat we say ? Entendez-vous ce que nous disons ? The same lohat is translated^by ce dont when followed by of, and by ce a quoi when followed by to ; as, — It is what you may he sure of, C'est ce dont vous pouvez etre sur. What you trust to is very uncer- Ce a quoi vous vous fiez est tres- tain, incertain. (3) When placed before a verb used interrogatively, it is translated according to Rule 51. ^ Turn this sentence and all such into if : if such a thing happened, what would you do ? Had he heen more prudent, S'il avail ete plus prudent. 76 EXERCISES. did you frighten ? 16. Does he not look nnwell ? 17. Do you not believe me? 18. What^ have I to complain of? 27. (Rules 62, 53, 54, 55, 56.) I. Par ou ^tes-vous venu, par Carlisle ou par New- castle? 2. Vous n'avez^ si je ne me trompe, que deux paires de souliers, une bonne et une mauvaise ; laquelle mettrez-vous aujourd^hui ? 3. Si c'est la Tami dont vous vous vantiez tant, je ne vous en fais pas mon compliment. 4. II y a deux freres Matthieu, Tun gros et court, Fautre grand et mince : duquel voulez-vous parler ? 5. Je parle de celui dont la femme vient de mourir. 6. Pour les- quelles de ces dames aviez-vous des lettres? 7. La ville d'ou vous venez n^est pas en Ecosse, mais en Angle- terre. 8. Je m'arretai un pen pour voir d'ou il venait. 9. Quand on est roi, on depend de tons ceux dont on a besoin pour se faire obeir,. 10. La bonne dont nous venons de nous defaire nous a vole plusieurs choses. II. '^ Arriere ceux dont la bouche Souffle le froid et le chaud.^*— La Fontaine. 12. ^^ Toi, dont le monde encore ignore le vrai nom, Esprit mysterieuxj mortel, ange, ou demon, Qui que tu sois, Byron, bon ou fatal genie, J'aime de tes concerts la sauvage harmonie." — Lamartine. 28. engraving, gravure (f.). to endeavor, s'efforcer de. to like best, preferer. task, tache (f.). to travel, voyager. to set fire to, mettre le feu a. * With the verbs servir and se plaindre, que is often used instead of a quoi and de quoi; as. Que sert voire mauvaise humeur? EXERCISES. 77 1. Which of these engravings do you like best ? 2. To which of these gentlemen did you speak? 3. With which of these ladies did you travel ? 4. Here are two hats ; which will you put on ? 5. Here is the street in which I was born. 6. That is the road by which we came. 7. What does your mother say ? ^^ 8. Which way do you pass to go to school ? 9. Our friend has taken some pencils ; which has he taken ? 10. The lady you speak of is dead. 11. Do you think he will come ? 12. The wife of the gentleman of whom you have just spoken is very clever.^ 13. Endeavor to finish the task that you have begun. 14. He is engaged in writing the history of which you saw the beginning. 15. Of which of these two men are you afraid ? 16. In what have I offended you ? 17. This is the way through which I passed. 18. To which house did he set fire ? 29. (Rules 57, 58, 59, 60, 61.) 1. On m'a dit ce matin que Gustave et son frere ont ea chacun leur maison pillee par des voleurs. 2. L\in et I'autre avaient^ dit-on de Pargent cache: ce sont, sans doute, ces deux tresors que les voleurs auront"^ flaires. 3. Que fera-t-on de tousr ces prisonniers qu'on a faits a I'ennemi ? 4. Les gardera-t-on jusqu'a la fin de la guerre, on les renverra-t-on dans leur pays en echange des notres ? 5. Que ne^^^^^ signe-t-on la paix tout de suite, au lieu de se tuer ainsi les uns les autres ? 6. La guerre est la plus * Besides its usual meaning, the future often implies, in French, doubt and surmise. Had the preceding facts been certain, the usual past tense would have been used. In English, the past is used in both cases. 78 EXEKCISES. grande calainite qui ^^'Liisse affliger rhumanite. 7. On lie devrait j avoir recours que quand on a epuise tons les autres moyens. 8. Chacun a sa maniere de voir. 9. Quand on est jeunes, riches et jolies comme vouSj mesdames^ on n'est point reduites^ a Partilice. 10. ^^ A votre age, ma fille^ on est bien curieuse." — Marmontel. 11. ^' On doit considerer, pour son propre interet, Et les temps ou Ton vit, et les lieux oii Ton est.'' — CORNEILLE. 12. '' Tout annonce d'un Dieu Teternelle existence ; On ne pent le comprendre, on ne pent Tignorer.'' — Voltaire. 30. circumstance, circonstance (f.). in one's turn, a son tour. wager, pari (m.)- to delight in, se plaire a. share, part (f.). to master, dompter. to injure (p.), nuire a (p.) . to he in ivant of, avoir besoin de. 1. You have been seen going outi I was told so. 2. Hide yourself, or you will be ordered to remain. 3. People don't like to be told their faults. ' 4. In every circumstance we should ^^ do our duty, whatever be the results. 5. It is said that he has lost his wager. 6. We do not always do what we ought to do. 7. They have each given me his share. 8. Both are mad. 9. My family has been injured by you.-^ 10. They like each * When on stands clearly as a definite pronoun for a woman or several individuals, the adjective is put in the feminine or the plural, according to the case. ^ On is used only in the nominative case, and can never be replaced by a personal pronoun. The third sentence must, therefore, be turned into : We do not like that one should tell us our faults. ^ Verbs requiring a can never be used in the passive ; all such verbs must absolutely be turned into the active voice. EXERCISES. 79 other. 11. Tliey all spoke, each m her turn. 12. Indus- trious scholars are liked, and people delight in praising them. 13. People say so, and it is thought that the news is true. 14. They praise, blame, threaten, caress him, but, whatever they may do, they cannot master him. 15. Do you knoAV if the letters have been received which were expected ? 16. We learn more easily what we understand, than what we do not understand. 17. Do you know what is said of you ? 18. We are often in want of experience, however ^ old we may be. 31. (Rules 62, 63, 64, 65.) 1. Les sciences, les arts et les lettres sont pour Phomme des elements de bonheurc 2. La vivacite on la langueur des yeux fait un des principaux caracteres de la physi- onomie. 3. C'est dans cette vaste plaine que s^est livree la bataille ; ici campaient nos troupes ; la s'elevaient les tentes de Tennemi. 4. II ne me reste que deux francs ; encore n'en suis-je pas bien sur. 5. Aussi ne ferai-je plus de depenses inutiles. 6. Tout le monde, noble, bourgeois, artisan, laboureur, y devient soldat. 7. S'il n^est pas fort riche, du moins a-t-il de quoi vivre. 8. Dut-il oublier tout ce que j'ai fait pour lui, je ne regretterai jamais de lui avoir ete utile. 9. Une epee nue, qui ne tenait qu'a un fil, fut suspendue sur la tete de Damocles, durant le magnifique banquet que lui donna Denys le Tyran. 10. "Le vers le mieux rempli, la plus noble pensee Ne pent plaire a Pesprit quand Poreille est blessee." — BOILEAU. 11. " Ou ton sang on le mien lavera cette injure." — Voltaire. 80 EXERCISES. 12. " Le ciel eblouissant, ce dome lumineux, Laisse echapper vers moi, dn centre de ses feux, Un rayon precurseur de la gloire supreme.'' — COLARDEAU. 32. look, regard (m.). it is all over, tout est fini. subject, sujet (m.). relations, parents (m.). fate, sort (m.). to require, exiger. Tio^c? / tenez ! to determine, vouloii. 1. The gentleness, the kindness of the great Henry has been celebrated by^ a thousand praises. 2. A threat; a prayer, a look is enough. 3. Great, rich, small, and poor, none can escape death. 4. Subjects, friends, relations, all (tout) betrayed him. 5. We had scarcely set out when he was killed. 6. Perhaps you were wrong not to answer his letter. 7. Neither your fate nor mine is worth envying. 8. What is the matter with your brother? 9. Perhaps he will come to-morrow. 10. Hold, here is the money which your father has given me. 11. I have visited the field where the battle of Waterloo was fought (se livrer). 12. When your father arrived, all was over. 13. (Either) you or your brother will come. 14. Your interest, your honor, God, each requires this sacrifice. 15. Time, wealth, . life, everything belongs to one's country. 16. You had scarcely gone out when she arrived. 17. Thus his fate determined it. 18. Perhaps I shall send you to Paris. * Passive verbs require de or par before the noun or pronoun which foUows them : de when the verb expresses an action in which the body is not concerned, and par when the verb ex^^resses an action of the body, or in which both the body and mind are concerned ; as, — She is liked by everybody, Elle est aimee de tout le monde. Tlie Prussians were often beaten Les Prussiens ont ete souvent by the French, battus par les Frangais. EXERCISES. 81 33. (Rules 66, 67, 68.) 1. Des que s'ouvre l?o bouche du mechant, les noirceurs et les desorclres se repandent dans la societe. 2. Vous ne savez pas, ce me semble, la maiiiere dont cela se fait, il faut vous J prendre autrement. 3. II y a longtemps qu'ils ne^^^^^^ se sont parle. 4. lis ne se voient plus depuis la mort de leur mere. 5. Ne vous flattez pas d'en etre quitte a si bon marche. 6. Vous etes toujours a vous flatter I'un Tautre. 7. II n'est, comme Pon dit, pire eau que celle qui dort. 8. En francais on ne met jamais le quantieme apres le mois, mais avant. 9. Dans les billets la date se met generalement a la fin. 10. Dans les lettres d'affaires on la met toujours en tete. 11. " Eends-moi chretienne et libre, a tout je me soumets." — Voltaire. 12. ^^ L'un et I'autre rival,"^ s'arretant au passage, Se mesure des yeux, s'observe, s'envisage.''— Boileau. 34. to gain a victory, remporter une boxer, boxeur. victoire ; gagner une bataille. to try a cause, juger un proces. in presence of , en -presence de. 1. The key will be found easily. 2. Several victories were gained by the French in the last war. 3. He has been punished by his father. 4. Health is main- tained by temperance. 5. These young people have wounded each other in our presence. 6, These boxers have punished each other severely. 7. They would have killed each other if the police had not shown themselves. * A noun following I'un et I'autre is always put in the singular. G 82 EXERCISES. 8. Your friends arrived^ last night; they were well received by everybody. 9. French is spoken here. 10. Butter sells very dear. 11. Everything is sold in this country. 12. Why do you not go there since you were told so? 13. The battle was fought at three o'clock. 14. We have been cheated. 15. How is * The following verbs are always conjugated with etre in their com- pound tenses : — accourir, to run to. aller, to go. arriver, to arrive. choir, to fall. deceder, to die. dechoir, to decay. echoir, to fall due. entrer, to come in. mourir, to die. naitre, to he horn. partir, to set out. rentrer, to come in again. retoumer, to return^ go hack, tomber, to fall. retomber, to relapse. sortir, to go out. venir, to come. devenir, to hecome. intervenir, to interpose. parvenir, to attain. provenir, to proceed. redevenir, to hecome again. re venir, to come hack, return. survenir, to hefall. raster, to stay. The following verbs are sometimes conjugated with avoir, and sometimes with etre, but in a different sense : — With avoir. With etre. convenir, to suit. to agree. demeurer, to remain no longer. to remain still. expirer, to die. to end. descendre, to take down. to come down. monter, to take up stairs. to go up staii^s. Lastly, some verbs take avoir or etre, according as they express an action or a state. They are : — apparadtre, to appear. changer, to change. coucher, to put in hed, to lie. croitre, to increase. deborder, to overflow. decamper, to decamp. disparaitre, to disappear. echapper, to escape. embellir, to emhellish. empirer, to make or to get loorse. grandir, to enlarge, to groiu. passer, to pass, to cross. rajeunir, to make or to groio young again. vieillir, to make or to grow old. EXERCISES. 83 that made ? 16. His cause will be tried to-morrow. 17. This wood will not burn. 18. That is sold very cheap. 35. (Rule 69.) 1. Dieu a dit, et les choses ont ete faites; il a com- mande, et elles ont ete creees. 2. La force des exercises auxquels on accoutumait les soldats romains^ les chemins admirables qu'ils avaient construits, les mettaient en etat de faire des marches longues et penibles. 3. Quand les Romains avaient plusieurs ennemis sur les bras, ils accor- daient une treve au plus f aible, qui se croyait trop heureux de I'obtenir. 4. Turenne, dans le siecle le plus fecond en grands hommes, n'eut point de superieur et ne compta qu'un rival. 5. L'empire qu' Alexandre avait conquis ne dura pas plus que sa vie, qui fut courte. 6. Les hommes, oubliant Tauteur de Punivers, adorerent le soleil qui les eclairait et la lune qui presidait a la nuit. 7. Napoleon' etait petit, mais ses yeux lancaient des eclairs. 8. Lors- qu'il parlait, tous I'ecoutaient avec respect. 9. Aussitot qu'il fut consul, il partit pour Dijon ; il rassembla, il organisa Tarmee ; il marcha contre les Autrichiens et les vainquit a Marengo. 10. Mon pere me fit jurer sur les autels que je serais jusqu'a la mort ennemi des Eomains; je le jurai, je Pai accompli. 11. "Graces a mon amour, je me suis Men servie Du pouvoir qu' Amur at me donna sur sa vie.'' — Racine. 12. " La Mollesse, a ces mots, sent sa langue glacee, Et, lasse de parler, succombant sous Peffort, Soupire, etend les bras, ferme Foeil et s'endort." — BOILEAU. 84 EXERCISES. 36. to hid, charger, dire. to pass, se passer. to give one's love, faire ses com- to hear, carry, porter. pliments. drunkenness, ivresse. to undergo, subir. politician, politique. change, changement (m.). to inculcate morality, former les ^row6/e, peine (f.)- bonnes moeurs. to free one's self with difficulty, to take (p.) to {a place), emmenei, se tirer difficilement. mener. 1. I have seen your mother to-day ; she told me to give you her love. 2. Europe has undergone great changes since the Norman conquest. 3. I received a letter this morning. 4. They wept the whole morning. 5. Has not your brother been playing with Henry to-day ? 6. Have you begun your exercise ? 7. No, sir; we have not begun yet. 8. Nobody has begun. 9. She freed her- self with great difficulty from the danger. 10. We left Glasgow in the beginning of this week. 11. I made this year a large profit on the grain that I bought last year."^ 12. The day has passed without rain. 13. Anacharsis used to say that the vine bears three kinds of fruit — drunkenness, sensuality, and repentance. 14. Philip, the^ father of Alexander the Great, was the greatest politician of his time. 15. He said, people amuse chil- dren with playthings, and men with oaths. 16. I was at dinner when you entered my house. 17. All that Socrates said, all that he did, tended to inculcate morality. 18. I was going to see you when I met your brother, who took me to the country, * Last year, last month, last week, are translated by Tannee demiere, le mois dernier, la semaine derniere. But the adjective dernier is placed before the noun, when the last of a number of years, months, or weeks is meant ; as, la demiere annee de sa vie, le dernier mois de Pannee, la demiere semaine des vacances. EXERCISES. 85 37. (Rule 69.) 1. Ce fut sur la fin d'une nuit du mois de septembre que je sortis du souterrain avec les voleurs. 2. J'etais arine comme eux, et je montais un assez bon cheval qu'on avait pris an meme gentilliomme dont je portals les habits. 3. II y avait si longtemps que je vivais dans les tenebres que le jour naissant ne man qua pas de m'eblouir; mais pen a peu nies yeux s'accoutumerent a le souffrir. 4. Xous attendions que la fortune nous offrit quelque bon coup a faire, quand nous apercumes un religieux monte sur une mauvaise mule. 5. Dans un cafe on parlait d'un vers obscur d'Horace. 6. Un jeune offlcier fit remarquer qu'un point d'interrogation mis a la fin rendrait le vers tres-clair. 7. Pope, petit, contrefait et vexe, lui dit : Mais savez-vous, Monsieur, ce que c'est qu'un point d'interrogation ? 8. Oui, Monsieur, c'est une petite chose crochue qui fait une question. 9. " Mes enfants, dans ce village, Suivi de rois, il passa ; Voila bien longtemps de qa ! Je venais d'entrer en menage. 10. " A pied, montant le coteau Ou pour v6ir je m'etais mise, 11 avait petit chapeau Avec redingote grise. 11. ^^ Pres de lui je me troublai ; II me dit : ' Bon jour, ma chere, Bonjour, ma chere. ^ II vous a parle, grand^mere, II vous a parle ! ^^ — Beranger. 86 EXERCISES. 38. it loas custotnary with Frederick, to give notice to, avertir (p.). Frederic avait coutume (de) . to cautioji, prevenir. to appear, paraitre. at the same time, en meme temps. viz., a savoir. accordingly, en consequence. to ask (p.) questions, faire des the next day, le lendemain. questions a. plainly, clairement. to happen, arriver. to cry {to exclaim), s*ecrier. to enlist, s'engager. to he bereft of one's senses, avoir the German language, I'allemand. perdu la tete. It was customary with Frederick the Great, whenever a new soldier appeared in his guards, to ask him three questions, viz., " How old are you ? How long have you been in my service ? Are you satisfied with your pay and treatment ? ^' It happened that a young soldier, born in France, who had served in his (own) country, desired to enlist in the Prussian service. His figure caused ^^ him to be accepted immediately; but he was totally ignorant of the German language, and his captain giving him notice that the king would question him in that tongue the first time he saw him, cautioned him at the same time to learn by heart the three answers that he was to make to the king. Accordingly, he learnt them by the next day ; and as soon as he appeared in the ranks, Frederick came up to interrogate him; but he happened to begin with the second question, and asked him, " How long have you been in my service ? '' " Twenty-one years," answered the soldier. The king, struck with his youth, which plainly indicated that he had not borne a musket so long as that, said to him much astonished, " How old are you ? '^ " One year, an't please your majesty " (n'en deplaise ct Voire Majeste). Frederick, more astonished still, cried, ^^You or I must certainly be bereft of our senses ! '' The EXERCISES. 87 soldier, who took this for the third question, replied firmly (avec aplomb), " Both, an't please your majesty.'' 39. (Rules 70, 71, 72, 73.) 1. Ecoutez, parlez, lisez, ecrivez francais le plus que vous pourrez. 2. Demandez-lui s'il serait venu avec nous s'il n'avait eu rien a faire. 3. lis n'auraient pas du aller au bal sans votre permission ; c'est fort mal a eux. 4. Comment! j'aurais^ travaille toute ma vie pour si peu ! 5. Dusse-je y perir, j'irai. 6. Quand j'aurai fini les ecrits d'Homere et de Virgile, et que je me serai bien penetre de toutes leurs beautes, je me mettrai aux autres poenies epiques. 7. Si vous allez a la campagne, j'irai avec vous : je ne veux plus vous quitter. 8. Si vous vendiez ce piano, vous en auriez bien 300 francs. 9. S'il venait a passer chez moi et que je n'y fusse pas, mes gens lui diraient ou nous sommes alles. 10. Je serais tres honore si vous m'accordiez votre protection, et si vous pouviez m'obtenir un emploi pres de vous. 11. Je vou- drais bien que M. votre frere put nous accompagner. 12. Aussitot qu'il arrivera, veuillez me prevenir. 13. Dans sa tragedie de Cinna, Corneille fait dire a Auguste, empereur des Eomains, maitrisant I'orage de sa colere: — •^ Je suis maitre d^ moi comme de I'univers : Je le suis — je le veux ! " 40. task, tache (f.), travail (m.)- to take (p.), conduire. to take a walk, faire une prome- to do a service, rendre un service, nade. * The conditional, besides its usual import, often means surprise ; as, — Could you ever he guilty of that, Tu aurais fait cela, toi ! — Merlet. 88 EXERCISES. 1. Nobody knows if he will die to-day or to-morrow. 2. The soldiers will do their duty well, if they are well cominanded. 3. I should be pleased if I saw you doing your duty. 4. When he has finished his task, he will take a walk. 5. As soon as you have done writing, we shall dine. 6. When you are ready, we shall begin. 7. Will you come with me ? As you like. 8. I shall leave in a moment. 9. We should always do our duty. 10. Will you do your sister this service ? 11. I should do it if I could. 12. I shall take her there if she will go. 13. I should take her there if she would go. 14. You should write more than you do. 15. They are not willing to come. 16. Should I go there ? 17. He should have paid the debt.=^ 18. I shall return in one moment. 41. (Rules 74, 75, 76.) 1. II veut qu'apres avoir sejourne quelques mois en Suisse, nous visitions ensemble tout le nord de Tltalie. 2. II semble, en vous lisant, que vous me parliez, que vous me donniez de sages conseils. 3. C'est une erreur bien deplorable que les hommes aient attache des noms pompeux aux plus foUes entreprises. 4. II faudra qu'ils obeissent s'ils ne veulent pas qu'on les punisse. 5. Je ne doute pas qu'avant deux annees cette ville n'ait beau- coup etendu son commerce. 6. Croyez-vous qu'ils aient rcQu ma lettre ? 7. Quelque obstine qu'on soit, il f aut bien que, bon gre mal gre, on se rende a Fevidence. * When should, ought, could, and might are followed by a past indefinite, they are translated by the conditional past of devoir, vouloir, or pouvoir, and the English participle is put in the infinitive : 11 aurait du payer la dette. EXERCISES. 89 8. Dieu exige que nous employions au soulagement de nos semblables les richesses qu'il nous a departies. 9. II se plaint qu'on Pait calomnie. 10. Ce magistrat se plaint que vous avez meconnu son caractere."^ 11. ^^ Craignez, seigneur, craignez que le ciel rigoureux Ke vous haisse assez pour exaucer vos voeux ! ^' — Racine. 12. " Mais il me semble, Agnes, si ma memoire est bonne, Que j'avais defendu que vous vissiez personne.'' — MOLIERE. 42. devotion, devouement (m.). to deny, nier. 1. It is better that you should come with me. 2. It seems that you have forgotten to write to her. 3. It seems to me that this tower is round. 4. Will you go to the country this morning ? No, I am afraid it will rain. 5. I fear she will not come. 6. Is it possible that that has happened ? 7. I am astonished that you have not seen him. 8. I have been walking in the Champs- Elysees this afternoon, and whom do you think I met as I was coming back ? 9. Do you doubt that I am your friend, after so many proofs of devotion ? 10. We hope he will soon come back from America. 11. I am glad that you are so well. < 12. I deny that that is true. 13. They are afraid that the general has not experience enough. 14. You do not think he has won the prize.t * Observe that, in the 9th sentence, the subjunctive Is required after se plaindre because there is some doubt implied upon the subject of the complaint; while in the 10th, as there is no doubt whatever in the magistrate's mind, the indicative is used. t This sentence may be translated in two different ways ; (1) If I simply recapitulate or repeat, for argument's sake, my interlocutor's 90 EXERCISES. 15. Take care lest he should see you here. 16. Do you forget that I am older than you ? 17. Do you wish me to come to your house to-night ? ^ 18. The law of God orders us to love our enemies. 43. (Rules 77, 78, 79, 80.) 1. II n'y a pas un homme qui n'ait^^^^^ ses defauts; le meilleur est celui qui en a le moins. 2. Eome, sous quelque gouvernement qu^elle ait ete, a ete heureuse dans ses entreprises. 3. L'empereur Antonin est un des plus grands princes qui aient regne. 4. II n'est metal si dur que le feu n'amoUisse. 6. On ne pent juger votre tra- vail avant que vous Payez accompli. 6. Peut-on livrer des batailles contre une nation aguerrie qui se defend courageusement, sans qu'il y ait de part et d'autre du sang repandu ? 7. Thales est le premier des Grecs qui ait enseigne que les ames sont immortelles. 8. Je ne sache pas t un pays plus agreable que le votre. 9. Le meilleur usage que Ton puisse faire de son esprit, dit Fenelon, c'est de s'en defier. opinion, without implying the least doubt about it, I shall. say, Vous ne croyez pas qu'il a remporte le prix. (2) But if, on the contrary, I am questioning my interlocutor about his opinion, then I must use the subjunctive. * After verbs expressing wish or will, the following verb must always be put in the subjunctive, unless the subjects of both verbs are in the same person ; in which case the second is put in the infinitive ; as, — / ivish I toere rich, Je voudrais etre riche. See observation 1 of Rule 82. ^ We say in the subjunctive, je ne sache pas, que je sache, for je ne connais pas, and this idiom gives the sentence an idea of doubt. EXERCISES. 91 10. " II faut cles cliatiments doiit I'univers fremisse." — Racine. 11. " Un homme en vaut uii autre, a moins que, par malheur, L'uii d'eux ii'ait corrompu son esprit et son coenr.'' — Destouches. 12. '' Quel indigne plaisir pent avoir Pavarice ? Et que sert d'amasser a moins qu'on ne jouisse?'' — BOURSAULT. 44. drunkenness, ivresse (f.). to soften, adoucir. shmnefid, honteux. motive, motif (m.)- to he proved, etre eprouve, etre a to marry (p.), epouser. Tepreuve. 1. You will not be esteemed unless you are modest. 2. Drunkenness is the most shameful state into which ^^ a man can fall. 3. One may say that the dog is the only animal whose fidelity is proved. 4. There is no grief that time does not ^^ ^^^ soften. 5. We must leave before it is night. 6. The merit of having done a good action, is the only good that cannot be taken from us. 7. Whoever you meet, don't stop. 8. Whatever ^^ your motives may be, your conduct will be condemned. 9. Come here, that I may speak to you. 10. Although adversity is an evil, it is often a remedy against the vices of prosperity. 11. Go away, lest he should come. 12. He is the only man thaj: I can trust. 13. There are few men who know where to look for true glory. 14. She will never marry a man who does not fear God. 15. She has married a man who fears God. 16. Look for a retreat in which you may be quiet. 17. The wise (man) behaves in such a way that men cannot reproach him with anything. 18. Behave so that your parents may glory in having such a son. 92 EXERCISES. 45. (Rules 81, 82.) 1. Je n'aurais pas cru qu'il eut ete possible d'apporter un aussi prompt remede au mal. 2. Je n'avais pas pense qu'il etit apporte si promptement tout ce que nous Tavions charge d'aclieter. 3. Les magistrats craignaient que de plus grands /desordres n'arrivassent. 4. Qui de nous croyait quails eussent rempli aussi exactement leurs en- gagements ? 5. Apres avoir travaille toute ma vie au profit des autres, il serait temps que je songeasse a moi et que je pourvusse aux besoins qui peuvent survenir un jour. 6. Nous nous soucierions pen qu'ils se facbassent contre nous. 7. II faudrait qu'il achevat aujourd'bui son travail, afin que demain je le revisse et que tu pusses aussitot le transcrire. 8. A peine suis-je arrive que deja il voudrait que je repartisse. 9. II suffirait que vous parussiez un moment, pour qu'aussitot chacun disparut. 10. Je ne crois pas que vous eussiez eu plus de patience que moi. 11. Sparte etait sobre avant que Socrate eut loue la sobriete. 12. '' J'ai meme def endu par une expresse loi Qu'on osat prononcer votre nom devant moi." — Racine. 46. fellow-citizen, concitoyen. to he married, se marier. to cut off, couper. to scatter, jeter, disperser. Salamis, Salamine. to paij honors, rendre les honneurs. Lyciirgus, Lycurgue. to be enough, suffire. to lie, coucher. to court, faire la cour a. regulation, reglement. for the sake of, pour Tamour de. 1. I should like, my son, to have you learn your lessons better, in order to please your teachers. 2. What EXERCISES. 93 man would like to be reproached for a small fault? 3. It was necessary that I should go there. 4. Trajan wished that his fellow-citizens should love him as a father. 5. Caligula wished that the Eoman people had only one head, in order to be able to cut it off with one blow. 6. Solon, when dying, ordered that his bones should be ^ taken to Salamis, that they should be burned, and that their ashes should be scattered over the country. 7. The laws of Lycurgus ordered that children should lie upon the bare ground. 8. They required them to be brought up in common, and that the sons of magistrates should be subjected to that regulation. 9. They* pre- scribed also that women should be married without a dowry. 10. Do you think I might speak tocher, if I went now ? 11. I did not think they would write to your sister. 12. I am afraid she will think that I have forgotten her. 13. I did not know that you had studied mathematics. 14. Caligula ordered that the Eomans should pay him divine honors. 15. Was it not enough that you should send somebody there ? 16. It is a mortifying thing for a young lady that a man should court her for the sake of her fortune. 17. He was the only man whom I could trust. 18. I would never havC' believed that you could have spoken so. 47. (Rules 83, 84, 85.) 1. Eire haut est un ridicule et une sottise. 2. Celui qui a tache de vivre de maniere a n'avoir pas besoin de songer a la mort, la voit venir sans effroi. 3. Je suis vraiment desole de ne pas pouvoir faire ce que vous me demandez. 4. Je voudrais ne pas savoir ecrire, disait 94 EXERCISES. Neron^ force de signer un arret de mort. 5. La religion nous apprend a respecter nos maitres, a souffrir nos egauxj a etre affables envers nos inferieurs, a aimer tons les hommes comme nous-memes. 6. II fant rougir de comniettre des f antes et non de les avouer. 7. Vous avez tort de penser que vous pouvez faire trembler I'Europe aux premiers preparatifs de guerre. 8. J'ai fait parler hier a M. votre pere, mais il a fait la sourde oreille. 9. Mon aniitie ne vous est pas suspecte, et j'ai acquis assez d' experience pour faire ecouter mes avis. 10. "Qui pardonne aisement invite a Foffenser.'' — CORNEILLE. 11. " Vouloir tromper le ciel^ c'est folic a la terre.'' — La Fontaine. 12. " Dieu t'a fait pour Taimer, et non pour le coniprendre." — Voltaire. 48. to reflect, reflechir. to procure, faire avoir (th.). to walk in, entrer. to procure for, faire avoir a (p.). to inquire particularly into (th.) , to send for, envoyer chercher, examiner (th.) de pres. faire venir. close by, tout pres. 1. Experience will prove to you the necessity of re- flecting before you speak, and yet more before you write. 2. He wishes to see you before you go; please walk in. 3. I thought I should never see you again. 4. Do you not remember meeting him at the Louvre ? 5. A teacher must punish the child who dares to disobey him. 6. I want to inquire particularly into that affair, before tell- ing you what I think of it.^ 7. It is very difficult * Penser requires de after it when it means to have an opinion of, or, in other words, when it has a direct object; it takes a when it means to apply one's mind to. EXEKCISES. 95 to please everybody. 8. An old proverb says, ^^It is better to give than to receive.'^ 9. Do not trust him ; he wants to deceive you. 10. Here are some young ladies who delight in singing, playing, chatting, and laughing. 11. Show me that. 12. I shall procure that situation for you. 13. If you like, I shall send for the doctor. 14. Do you want to get your throat cut? 15. I shall have three new gowns made next week. 16. He has had a new house built in London. 17. Where do you get your shoes made ? 18. I get them made at the shoemaker's who lives close by. C 49. (Rules 86, 87.) 1. EUe gravissait dans les tenebres, saisissant tour a tour les branches et les racines qu'elle rencontrait. 2. Toutes les planetes circulant autour du soleil parais- sent avoir ete mises en mouvement par une impulsion commune. 3. Les trois voyageurs palissants voyaient a la clarte de la foudre passer le lion, le tigre, le lynx, le 'leopard, tremblants comme eux. 4. Une humeur plaisante n'est pas celle des vieillards souffrants. 5. Nous avons eprouve une inexprimable joie en apercevant le port que nous n'esperions plus revoir. 6. lis ont eu la temerite de s'engager sur cette mer mugissante. 7. Point d'importuns laquais epiant nos discours, comptant nos morceaux d'un oeil avide et murmurant d'un trop long diner. 8. II trouva les Macedoniens non seulement aguerris, mais encore triomphants. 9. C'est une personne d'un naturel doux, ne grondant, ne contredisant, ne desobligeant jamais. 10. H y a des peuples qui vivent errants dans les deserts. 96 EXERCISES. 11. " Je peindrai les plaisirs en f oule renaissants, Les oppresseurs du peuple a leur tour gemissants.'^ — BOILEAU. 12. " J^entends des cris de guerre an milien des nanf rages, Et les sons de Pairain se melant anx orages.'^ — La Harpe. 50. to cry out, crier. to banter^ raiUer. io purpose, se proposer de. lohile (adv. foHowed by pres. pipe, pipe (f.) . part.), tout en. disposition, caractere (m.). 1. I saw her arriving. 2. I hear somebody crying out. 3. Early rising is very good for the health, 4. I purpose going to London next week. 5. I remember it without your telling me. 6. Those Avretches are trem- bling with fear. 7. Lowing oxen and bleating sheep came in crowds. 8. You will find them smoking ^ their pipes. 9. I hear him rising every morning- at a quarter past five. 10. We have obtained peace by making great sacrifices. 11. This woman is of a good disposition, obliging every one whenever she can. 12. He tells him the truth, while bantering him. 13. I doubt his coming. 14. I am not afraid of his forgetting me. 15. I am thinking of that poet's having finished so long a poem in so short a time. 16. I see him playing in the street. 17. I saw him playing in the street. 18. You laugh at my not being able to speak Erench ; don't you ? 51. (Rules 88, 89.) 1. lis ont ete exemptes des charges publiques, attendu leurs infirmites. 2. Passe dix heures, je ne vous attends * Translate as if it were in the act of smoking , en train de fumer. EXERCISES. 97 plus. 3. Nous sommes trois, y compris votre soeur. 4. Vous avais-je accorde toute ma confiance pour la voir si inclignenient traliie ? 5. La justice est due aux pauvres aussi bien qu'aux riches. 6. Le champ de bataille etait couvert de morts et de mourants etendus les uns sur les autres. 7. Les assieges n'out rendu la ville qu'apres avoir defendu longtemps contre une armee enti^re leurs families^ leurs Mens et leur liberte. 8. Les meilleures harangues sont celles que le coeur a dictees. 9. II a eu tous les desagrements que nous avions pense. 10. Parmi cette foule de princes que Pabus du pouvoir a precipites du trone, plusieurs ont peri pour expier des injures personnelles dont ils s'etaient rendus coupables ou qu'ils avaient autorisees. 11. ^^ II balance dans Fair sa redoutable epee Fumante encor * du sang dont il I'avait trempee/' — C. Delavigne. 12. " soeurs, o pales soeurs! sur qui done priez-vous ? Qui de vous va mourir ? Qui de vous abandonne Un vain reste de jours oublies et perdus ? Car vous, filles de Dieu, vous ne les comptez plus.'' — A. DE MUSSET. 52. to keep up, entretenir. felloic-citizens, concitoyens. to separate {from each other), se injury, offense (f.). separer. ^ ^o a^^pZ?/ (th.), appliquer. fight, combat (m.) . hlue-sto eking, i^mmQ savante, bas- Cassar, Cesar. bleu. like, ressemblant. loeak-minded people, esprits fai- Aristides, Aristide. bles. 1. How many ^^^ praises have been given to Washing- ton ! 2. Spain is almost always torn by intestine wars, * The e of encore may be elided in poetry. H 98 EXERCISES. kept up by ambition. 3. The armies having separated, the fight ceased. 4. We have read the books which you have lent us^ and we should have read them again, if you had not asked for them back so soon. 6. I do not doubt ^^ but j^ou will use all your efforts to^^ fulfil my hopes of you. 6. How many^^^ provinces has Caesar ravaged ! 7. We have examined the portraits which the painter has sent us ; we have not found that they re- semble your mother. 8. Aristides pardoned his fellow- citizens the injury w^hich he had received from them. 9. You do not always apply the rules which I have given you. 10. Where are the rewards you have promised me ? 11. The letters which M""^ de Sevigne has written are admired by everybody. 12. The comedies which Moliere has composed, the portraits which he has given us of the miser and of the blue-stocking, have made him many enemies among weak-minded people. 53. (Rules 88, 89.) 1. Les grands orateurs que j'ai entendus parler m'ont rallie, un moment du moins, aux opinions que je leur ai entendu soutenir tour a tour. 2. Pour etre sur de la verite de ces choses, il faut les avoir vues s'accomplir. 3. Vous avez aime votre prochain si vous lui avez rendu tons les services que vous avez pu et que vous avez du. 4. Cette femme est plus instruite que je ne I'aurais cru. 6. II est vrai que lui et moi nous nous sommes parle des yeux. 6. La haine s'est emparee de leurs ames : quelles dures choses ils se sont dites ! 7. Les honneurs que j'ai rcQus, c'est mon talent qui me les a valus. 8. Combien d'erreurs n'a-t-on pas signalees dans les travaux qu'on EXERCISES. 99 les avait charges de faire ! 9. Le pen de troupes qu'il a rassemblees ont tenii ferme dans leur poste. 10. Les Eusses ont fait, en quatre-vingts ans que les vues de Pierre ont ete suivies, plus de progres que nous n'en avons fait en quatre siecles. 11. '^ Que de soins m'eut coutes cette tete cliarmante ! '' — Racine, 12. " II est si beau, Penf ant, avec son doux sourire, Sa douce bonne foi, sa voix qui veut tout dire, Ses pleurs vite apaises ; Laissant errer sa vue etonnee et ravie, Offrant de toutes parts sa jeune ame a la vie Et sa bouclie aux baisers! '' — Victor Hugo. 54. good works {good actions) ^honnQS Bluebeard, Barbebleue. oeuvres. to make (p.) as/iamec?, faire honte to help, servir, aider. a. to make (before an adj.), rendre. to pass aioay, s'ecouler. 1. The lessons that I have learned, the exercises that I have written, the rewards that I have received, and the punishments they^' have given me, have helped to make me useful to society. 2. How many good works that great man has done ! 3. How many unfortunate (people) he has relieved ! 4. '^he bells which we have heard ringing are those which we saw cast. 5. The swal- lows which I have seen coming back have announced to me the return of spring. 6. Gentlemen, where are the books that I saw you reading, the songs that I heard you singing, the music books that I gave you yesterday? 7. We made them laugh when we told them the story of Bluebeard. 8, These pupils have 100 EXERCISES. more books than I have given them. 9. Vauban has for- tified more towns than others have destroyed. 10. The tragedies of Crebillon are not so good as we had thought. 11. The English have gained on land more victories than I had thought. 12. Do you remember the intense heat that there was in Belgium three years ago ? 13. The little affection which you have shown me proves that you are no longer a friend of mine. 14. The little delicacy which you have evinced in this affair should make you ashamed. 15. The few days which I have spent in your house have soon passed away. 55. (Rules 90, 91, 92.) 1 II marche, dort, mange et boit tout comme les autreSj mais cela n'empeche pas qu'il ne soit fort malade, 2. Nous sommes plus riches que nous ne pensons. 3. II ne tient pas a moi que cela ne se fasse. 4. Pen s^en est fallu qu'il ne fut tue. 6. Peut-on nier que la sante ne soit preferable aux richesses ? 6. Je tremble que votre frere n' arrive en ce moment. 7. On ne pent pas douter que les poles ne soient converts d^une coupole de glace. 8. Vous avez bien peur que je ne change d'avis. 9. " Mais il ne tient qu'a vous que son chagrin ne passe." — MOLIERE. 10. ^^Et que faire en un gite a moins que Ton ne songe?'^ — La Fontaine. 11. -^ Deux medecins n'ont pu lui donner le trepas : II ne mourra jamais ! '' — Destouches. 12. "'^i Taveugle hasard ni Paveugle matiere N'ont pu former mon ame, essence de lumiere.'' — Lamartine. EXERCISES. 101 56. to speak one's mind, dire sa fagon the fancies, les idees. de penser. to take into one's head, se mettre to come and fetch, venir prendre. dans la tete. 1. I understand Frencli pretty well, but I have not yet studied it long enough to speak it fluently. 2. Did you not speak ill of me last night? 3. jSTo, I always speak well of you. 4. You should write your exercises better. 5. We amused ourselves very well last night. 6. I do not dare to speak to him. 7. Take care lest he see yon. 8. I do not deny that this is true. 9. You will be scolded if you don't take care. 10. Why {que) do you not speak your mind to him ? 11. I will not go out if you do not come and fetch me. 12. I shall not go out unless you come and fetch me. 13. We have not seen him for a fortnight. 14. We despise those who speak differently from what they think. 15. Who does not know the fancies that she has taken into her head? 16. Take care lest that child should fall. 17. It is I who prevent his coming. 57. (Rules 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100.) 1. Y a-t-il rien de plus rare qu'un demi-savant modeste? 2. Venez done voir la belle robe que ma mere s'est ache- tee; je n'ai rien vu de si joli. 3. Je ne connais personne de si aimable qu'Auguste; tout le monde en raffole. 4. En tout temps la vertu s'est fait estimer. 5. II y a trois mois que je vous ai ecrit pour vous avertir du danger que vous couriez. 6. Yenez passer deux ou trois semaines chez nous, vous ne vous en trouverez pas plus mal. 7. Je finirai bien cela en quinze jours. 8. Alors, 102 EXERCISES. si vous commencez demain en huit, yous serez tout-a-fait libre dans trois semaines. 9. II y a ici qnelqn'un de trop ; combien devons-nous etre ? 10. Nous devrions etre dix, mais Henri est parti pour six semaines. 11. "Pendant ces jours^ durant ces tristes scenes, Que faisiez-vous dans vos cloitres deserts.'' — Gresset. 12. " Voici trois medecins qui ne nous tronipent pas : Gaite, doux exercice et modeste repas/' -DUMOUSTIER. 58. to let see, faire voir. to be so kind as to, avoir la bonte, to fall ill, tomber malade. I'obligeance, de. to allow, laisser. 1. I have bought something very pretty ; I shall let you see it to-night. 2. If you fall ill while trying to complete that work in a month, you will not be the richer for it."^ 3. She is going to write to you to beg a favor of you. 4. He will do anything to oblige you. 5. It is necessary to know the human heart to judge well of others. 6. I forbid you to do that. 7. Would you be so kind as to help me ? 8. I think I had better allow you to do it yourself. ' 9. It has been raining for three days. 10. I study for ten hours every day. 11. He has * The more or the less for it is translated in French by davantage, plus, or moins, with en before the verb. ^ When one or two pronouns are to be placed before the verb, if there are two verbs, place them before the last, unless the first is faire or laisser ; as, — S>he icants to give it to you, EUe veut vous le donner. She will let you see them, EUe vous les fera voir. However, in the best authors of the seventeenth century, the pro- noun or pronouns are generally placed before the first verb ; as, — '* Soleil, je te viens voir pour la demiere fois." —Racine. EXERCISES. 103 not been able to get provisions for the winter. 12. Did you live in South America ? 13. Do you not find a great charm in her society ? 14. It will take you two or three sessions to learn French. 15. We shall arrive in Paris in two days. 16. How long^ have you been living in Scotland ? 17. I do not live in Scotland, but in England, at Bristol. 59. (Rules 101, 102, 103.) 1. II en sera ainsi, que voiis le vouliez ou non. 2. Je n'aurai point de repos que je n'aie la certitude de reussir. 3. Que d'amis vous avez ! 4. Vous ne partirez point que je ne le sache. 5. Attendez, que nous venions. 6. Je ne saurais voir d'honnetes peres chagrines par leurs enfants que cela ne m'emeuve. 7. Je ne puis travailler qu'aussi- tot je ne sois malade. 8. Je ne leur donnai point de repos qu'ils ne m'eussent fait venir un fripier. 9. Per- sonne, dit M'""^ de Sevigne, n'apprit la mort de M. de Turenne qu'il ne crut Parmee taillee en pieces. 10. Allez vite porter cette lettre et ce journal a la poste. * How long is translated in three different ways : — (1) By combien de temps with the compound tense (past indefinite) to express a past action ; as, — How long did you live in Finance? Combien de temps avez-vous de- meure en France ? (2) By depuis quand with the present, if the action is still going on ; as, — How long have you been here 9 Depuis quand etes-vous ici? (3) By combien de temps with the future to express a future tense ; as, — Hoio long will you stay there ? Combien de temps y resterez-vous? 104 EXERCISES. 11. '' Je ne vous quitte pointy Seigneur, que mon amour n'ait obtenu ce point." — CORNEILLE. 12. '' Que la terre est petite a qui la voit des cieux ! '' — Delille. 60. to go a journey, faire un voyage. to teach, enseigner. to favor, favoriser. to he engaged, etre occupe. morality, morale (f.). no matter, il n'importe. 1. He never goes a journey but lie comes back with a cold. 2. If you read history, and if you look for a prince equally favored and persecuted by fortune, you will find him in the person of Henry lY., Emperor of Germany. 3. He will not write to you until you come. 4. How much injustice that magistrate h?vS committed ! 5. How many prejudices the Eevolution has destroyed in France ! 6. I hope you will come and tell me all that you know about it. 7. Eun and fetch my book. 8. How fine and noble is the morality taught by Christ ! 9. It is six years since I have seen my country. 10. I arrived the day you left. 11. She never comes to our house without bringing a plaything to my children. 12. If you don^t see me oftener, it is because I am very much engaged. 13. Whether you write or not, it is no matter. 14. How very unhappy that woman looks ! ^ 15. Go and wash your hands. 16. Go and beg his pardon. * The adjective used with avoir Pair agrees with I'air, that is, is masculine, though speaking of a woman, when Pair refers to outward appearance; but if Pair refers to a physical defect or quality, it is better to use etre or some other equivalent expression, such as sembler, paraitre ; as, — ** Cette demoiselle a Pair d'etre bossue, ces fruits me paraissent bons." — Merlet. PART SECOND. I. EXERCISES ON IDIOMS. 61. (Section 1 .*) 1. A Pentendre, c'est tonjours moi qui ai tort. 2. Paites- vous-y. 3. Je me soucie fort pen de vos affaires ; adressez- vous a d'autres. 4. Si voiis voulez savoir de qiioi il s'agit, ne cominencez pas par me dire des injures. 5. Mettons- nons an travail avec ardenr ; ne nons deconrageons pas ; Paris n'a pas ete fait en nn jonr. 6. Je Ini ai dit d'abord que les bons comptes font les bons amis; sur ce, il s'est mis a m'injnrier. 7. J'ai tenn bon, et je Ini ai fait rendre compte, jonr par jonr, de tont ce qn'il a depense depnis nn mois. 8. jST'est-ce pas qn'il vons a tont avone de son propre monvem6nt ? 9. Cette lettre n'est pas d'elle, elle n'est pas en etat d'en faire nne pareille. 10. Soyez tranqnille, je snis fait a son badinage. 11. La panvre fille ! Ces gens-la penvent bien la tonrmenter a lenr aise ; elle est bien trop liere ponr se plaindre. * Section numbers refer to the List of Idiomatic Words and Phrases, beginning on page 183. 105 106 EXERCISES. 62. 1. I hope you are going to set about work with fresh courage. 2. You inay''^ find it rather difficult in the beginning, but you will get accustomed to it. 3. Can he not give an account of what has passed? 4. You had better not speak to him any more about that affair, he wdll not yield an inch. 6. It is to be hoped they will take our expenses into account. 6. Do not care about what they say. 7. He has abused the confidence his father had placed in him. 8. Why do they not accustom themselves to our way of living? 9. I shall call him to account for this shameful behavior. 10. We must not abuse the mercies God sends us. 11. I shall forgive you your fault, if you confess it of your own accord. 12. Are you able to do this work well ? 13. He is the most ignorant man in the town ; he does not know A from B. 14. Let us take her youth into account, she did it to the best of her ability. 15. As for you, you will easily accomplish what they have given you to do. 16. I had scarcely entered, when he launched into abuse of me. 17. Is it thus you always abuse people ? 63. (Section 2.) 1. Nous avons Phonneur, Monsieur, de vous accuser reception de la lettre que vous avez bien voulu nous adresser le 13 courant. 2. Ne lui faites pas part de ce qui s'est passe, je vous prie; il sera toujours temps qu'il le sache. 3. La semaine derniere, nous avons joue entre nous un Proverbe de Souvestre; c'est moi qui faisais le papa, et ma S(jeur Louise qui faisait la maman. 4. Si vous faites connaissance avec lui, vous vous en EXERCISES. 107 mordrez les doigts plus tard. 5. Laissez-iious done tran- quilles avec cette lettre ; que de bruit vous faites pour une misere ! 6. Celui qui ment fait le brave avee Dieu, et le poltron avec les liommes. 7. Allons ! faites voir que vous avez du cffiur, et ne vous elf ray ez pas x^our si peu de chose. 8. Si vous faites sa connaissance, il ne cessera de vous emprunter de Pargent^ il est toujours sans le sou. 9. Maintenant que le voici riche^ il ne me salue plus dans la rue ; il tranche du grand seigneur. 10. Si vous avez encore mal au doigt, n'ecrivez pas^ niais preparez bien votre lecon. 11. Je n'en ferai ni une ni deux ; je le consignerai a ma porte. 12. Ca, ca change la these, mais ne craignez-vous pas les suites de sa colere ? 64. 1. After acting so foolishly, you need not wonder that your head aches. 2. I shall acknowledge his letter, and I hope by this means to get acquainted with him. 3. Go to him, and act like a man. 4. Did she not impersonate that character beautifully ? o. I must not take advan- tage of his absence to injure him. 6. He affects the manners of an aristocrat. 7. Do not be afraid of that dog; he Avill not bite you. 8. I shall not have to acquaint him with this melancholy fact. 9. What is the use of making so much ado about nothing? 10. He pretends to be deaf, but he hears all we are saying. 11. I am afraid we shall not reach our destination to- night. 12. My dear sir, if you don't take advantage of that opportunity, you will be acting contrary to reason. 13. That gold Avatch suits me very well, but I cannot afford to buy it. 11. How was it that you did not get acquainted with that gentleman ? 15. Do not look for 108 EXERCISES. Jules, he has gone in advance. 16. My teeth ache so much that I have scarcely slept these three days. 17. He always made a great fuss for nothing. 18. He counterfeits lameness. 19. You ought to be able to afford to buy it, after making so much money. 20. She was in the act of opening the window, when I accosted her. 21. He took advantage of his uncle, and so gave his enemies an advantage over him. 22. His brother called him to account for the way he spent his sister's money. 23. Of her own accord she told us all that had passed. 24. How do you account for the earthquakes that take place ? 25. He set about teaching, but did not succeed. 65. (Section 3.) 1. Est-ce bien a cela qu'il vise ? 2. C'est d'elle qu'il tient. 3. Bien certainement je Paurais fait, s'il n'avait tenu qu'a cela. 4. Laissez-nous done tranquilles, vous ne savez ce que vous dites. 5. Prenez garde, mon cher; je crois que c'est a votre position qu'il en veut. 6. Est-ce que cela ne m'est pas egal ? 7. Si je vous en fais des reproches, c'est a contre-coeur, croyez-le bien. 8. Pardon, Monsieur, je suis etranger, et je ne suis pas bien sur du sens qu'il me f aut attacher a vos expressions : que voulez-vous dire par ces paroles : '^ II en passera par on vous voudrez ?^^ 9. Je veux dire que vos condi- tions seront les siennes, et qu'il signera tout les yeux fermes. 10. Vous avez beau dire et beau faire, je n'admettrai jamais qu'on se conduise avec une telle impertinence. 11. Ce n'est peut-etre pas une imperti- nence reelle ; peut-etre a-t-il cru bien faire ; les coutumes different comme les langues, et il faut savoir passer EXERCISES. 109 qiielque chose" un eWanger. 12. Reconnaissez main- tenant que vous etes un pea trop vif ; en convenez-vous enlin ? 66. 1. Leave her alone; is she not of an age to know (how) to behave herself ? 2. I cannot ask him to do it against his will. 3. He was not able to tell what ailed him. 4. Did she not do it against her will ? 5. You must not always agree to whatever she proposes. 6. Let me alone; I want to enjoy the fresh air. 7. I admit that I was wrong ; what ^^ do you conclude from it ? 8. He takes after his father in that. 9. It must be done after the English fashion. 10. I never could agree with him on any subject. 11. Try to persuade him that I do it against my will. 12. She takes after her mother in. her taste for dress. 13. It is tiresome to walk the same road every day. 14. Do you admit that the thing took place as I say ? 15. What ails your father ? 16. Is it not all one to me, whether ^^^ he goes or remains ? 17. Is it to me that you allude ? 18. Come with us, you will see that the sea air will agree with you. 19. He must agree to whatever I propose. 20. Does he not take after his cousin ? 21. .The Queen allows him two hundred a year. 22. They found no lodgings upon their arrival, and were obliged to sleep in the open air. 23. He aimed at the consulship, but could not get it. 24. What ails your dog ? 25. Do as you like, it is all one to me. 67. (Section 4.) 1. Vous auriez tort de lui en vouloir, elle n'a jamais songe a vous nuire. 2. A qui vous etes-vous adresse ? 110 EXERCISES, Est-ce a la maitresse de la maisoii? 3. Vous me faites honte avec vos coudes perces; allez changer de paletot. 4. C'est a eux que j'aurai recours pour vous faire avoir cette place. 6. Yoyons, est-ce que cela ne reviendra pas au merne au bout du compte ?' 6. Ce n'est plus a vous qu'il en veut, a ce qu'il parait ; c'est bien a moi. 7. J'ai change d'idee; je n'irai que demain. 8. Je ne sache pas qu'il m'en veuille, mais, quand cela serait, (ja m'est parfaitement egal. 9. Avec ces gens-la il ne faut pas parler a mots converts, il faut aller droit au but. 10. II est tombe des nues quand je lui ai dit pour- quoi M'"^ votre mere s'etait mise en colere contre moi. 11. Eestez-en la, il est evident que cela le tracasse. 12. J^ai peur, mon cher Monsieur, que vous ne vous y soyez pris trop tard ; il y a toute apparence que la place est prise. 68. 1. Are you not very angry with your brother ? 2. You ought to be ashamed of your laziness. 3. Did you not apply to your uncle for that ? 4. It amounts to the same thing. 5. He will alter his mind when ^^ he has well considered the thing. 6. You must not be angry at his departure. 7. l^our remarks do not apply to this subject. 8. We ought to be more anxious about our health than our wealth. 9. Does it not amount to the same thing ? 10. Do you approve of her coming to see you? 11. From what I see, you do not wish to do it. 12. Were you not always very anxious about your son when he was at sea ? 13. Now, don't change your mind, as you always do. 14. Amuse yourself to your heart's content, after working so well. 15. How can you be angry at such an innocent joke ? 16. If it is an annoy- EXERCISES. Ill ance to you, sir, I will let it alone. 17. He is very apt to slander people. 18. It will amount to the same thing one hundred years hence. 19. As it apx-)ears, you have made up your mind. 20. He will apologize to you for his conduct, I answer for it. 21. Apply yourself to your lessons, for there is every indication that you will have to teach. 22. Try to settle that question amicably. 23. Don't you think it is rather a far-fetched argument ? 24. As I was going down town last evening, I met them walking arm in arm. 25. He anticipated his income, so now he has not a cent. 69. (Section 5.) 1. Vous avez beau prier et supplier ; tout cela ne servira de rien. 2. S'il s'informe de moi, dites-lui que je vais tout doucement. 3. Si nous Pinvitions a diner pour samedi, qu'en pensez-vous ? 4. II n'en revenait pas. 5. II avait si faim qu'il a mange comme quatre. 6. Vou- loir arranger une affaire comme celle-la, Monsieur, c'est vouloir prendre la lune avec les dents. 7. Veuillez me preter la plus grand e attention, je vous prie ; ce que je vais vous dire est de la plus haute importance. 8. A quoi bon vous mettre a genoux devant lui ? toutes vos supplications ne vous^ serviront de rien. 9. Elle a eu la bonte de s'informer de moi ; rappelez-moi a son bon souvenir la premiere fois que vous la verrez. 10. De- cidement ce monsieur s'en fait trop accroire ; voyez done comme il se rengorge; il se croit le premier moutardier du pape. 11. Faites-la entrer au salon ; je suis a elle dans une minute. 12. N'etait il pas prevenu de ce mal- heur avant mon arrivee ? 112 EXERCISES, 70. 1. If you are not mucli attached to your dog, you would do well to give it to me. 2. That servant is all attention to her mistress. 3. Why did you not ask him to dinner? 4. He was perfectly astounded at the intelligence. 5. He pays attention to all that is said to him. 6. He never availed himself of the many chances he had. 7. Such a thing happens once a^ year on an average. 8. Your evidence avails nothing in this case. 9. He attended to his business, and I to mine. 10. He was asked to dine with us, but refused. 11. I am perfectly aware of that. 12. Why do you not pay attention to the orders of your officers ? 13. He is astounded at the results. 14. Ought I to ask her to come in for a few minutes ? 15. If you avail yourself of all these chances, you must succeed. 16. It will avail you nothing to go there. 17. He should ^^ attend more to his business. 18. Have you asked after the sick lady who has come to live beside us? 19. Not to be aware of so important a historical event as that betrays gross ignorance. 20. How very awkward that young man looks ! 21. If they call, ask them in. . 22, Take two from seven, five remain. 23. All his perseverance availed nothing. 24. You must pay attention to what is said to you. 25. Shut the window, that music dis- tracts your attention. 26. To attend the class is not all that is necessary, you must also attend to your lessons. 71. (Section 6.) 1. Elle a un oncle fort riche dont elle doit heriter. 2. Oil il n'y a rien, dit un vieux proverbe, le roi perd EXERCISES. 113 ses droits. 3. C'est lui qui vous a tenu lieu cle pere. 4. Trouvez-vous-y a sept lieures. 5. Comment pouvez- vous vous bien porter ? vous ne faites que boire et manger toute la journee. 6. II en est d'un secret comme d'un tresor; des qu'une fois on sait ou il est^ on ne tarde pas a le decouvrir. 7. Le roi deniandait un jour a un lit- terateur francais s'il croyait en Dieu: "Oui, Sire, j'aime a croire/' repondit I'ecrivain, ^^qu'il y a un Etre au-dessus des rois.'' 8. Je me trouve lieureux chez moi ; j'y vis selon mes gouts, je ne depends de personne. 9. Mai lui a pris de s'attaquer a elle. 10. Si vous lui dites ca, vous allez vous le mettre a dos. ^ 11. J'ai quitte Londres .pour New York il y a de cela quel que s annees, mais j'avoue que j'ai perdu au change. 12. Je suis a vous a Pinstant; je ne fais qu'aller et venir. 72. 1. He is badly off for money now, his father has just failed. 2. Take care that he is not left on your hands. 3. It is too bad to treat him so disrespectfully. 4. I should have been bankrupt the week after if money had not come in. 5. Be that as it may, you were wrong from the first. 6. Ought we not to be at the Exchange an hour before the mail arrives ? 7. He was a father to those poor childreii. 8. They are always talking nonsense. 9. What is it to me whether ^^^ he comes or not ? 10. You are always complaining ; is it not with you as with others ? 11. That precious friend of yours is eating and drinking the whole day. 12. What is that to me, provided he does it honestly ? 13. Do not be afraid, I shall back you. 14. There are many people in this world who never trouble themselves about the 114 EXERCISES. morrow. 15. You ought to write to him, he is badly off. 16. Now that you have matters in your own hands, you can make (your) fortune. 17. What can prevent our being ^' at the station in time ? 18. You are to be taken there at once. 19. It would be as well to let it alone ; let us go. 20. What is that to me, provided I get m.y money ? 21= You are always slandering your brother. 22. There would be more apples if the boys had not stolen so many. 23. Please wait for me, I shall be back presently. 24. I bought all the house furniture, and she gave me an old trunk with the contents in the bargain. 23. He was astounded to hear that you were still a bachelor. 73. (Section 7.) 1. J^espere que vous n'allez pas vous mettre a travailler, malade comme vous etes ! 2. Vous feriez bien mieux de garder le lit. 3. Ne m'en sachez pas mauvais gre, je Fai fait pour le mieux. 4. Ce n'est pas a vous que j'en veux, c'est a lui. 5. II vous sied bien de trouver a redire a sa conduite ! 6. D'avocat que vous etiez, ne vous etes-vous j)as fait marchand de vin ? 7. Non, non, je ne vous en veux pas pour ce que vous avez dit, c'est contre votre soeur que j'ai de la rancune. 8.. Eh bien! trouvez-vous cela difficile maintenant? vous voyez qu'il n'y a que le premier pas qui coute. 9. II parait que Faffaire s'emmanche mal ; a en croire votre frere, mieux vaudrait nous en tenir la. 10. Puisque j'ai encore un bout de temps, je porterai ma lettre a la poste, et je verrai votre soeur en passant; ce sera faire d'une pierre deux coups. 11. J'ai beau faire, je ne puis pas lui fourrer cela dans la tete. EXERCISES. 116 74. 1. How can that be, if you don't know the way to set about it ? 2. Would it not be better to set out now ? 3. Why should she bear ill-will toward her sister? 4. From (a) surgeon he became (a) soldier. 5. I must beg of him to do it at once. 6. You should not begin to work so late. 7. Would it not be better to set out for New York by the first mail packet ? 8. Between this and Wednesday we have plenty of time to think over the matter. 9. Let us go in; I am benumbed with cold. 10. How long were you confined to your bed with that illness ? 11. He confesses that he had a hand in it ; it cannot be better. 12. Did you not beg of him to say nothing about it ? 13. Had she not better go away before her brother arrives ? 14. In spite of the promises which he had made, he began again worse than ever. 15. Between this and Sunday you will have to finish that task. 16. He bears ill-will toward no one. 17. May I beg of you not to keep us waiting so long? 18. It becomes you indeed to speak so ! 19. He wishes to go ; let it be so ; he will soon repent. 20. Had we not better walk over to your uncle's this evening ? 21. Your bonnet becomes you very much. 22. Will you not bear witness to what took place ? 23. In that way, he killed two birds with one stone. 24. She was much benefited by her sea voyage. 25. That money ought to have been paid three weeks ago, but better late than never. 75. (Section 8.) 1. II doute que j'en vienne a bout. 2. EUe partait d'un eclat de rire an moment oii j'ouvrais la porte. 3. Est-ce 116 EXERCISES. la ce que voiis appelez bon ton ? 4. C'est pcur vous Jeter de la poudre aux yeux qii'il vous dit cela ; ue eroyez pas un mot de ce qu'il vous conte. 5. Si c'est comme cela que vous vous y prenez, vous n'en viendrez jamais a bout. 6. Ce secret doit vous etre a charge ; ne pouvez-vous me le eonfier ? 7. On prit la ville sans coup ferir. 8. N 'est-ce pas chez vous que le feu a pris hier soir ? 9. Je ne me soucie pas plus de votre colere que de Pan quarante ; est-ce que, par hasard, vous eroyez me faire peur avec votre grosse voix? 10. Par exemple ! a-t-on jamais vu pareille cliose ! 11. Ou etes-vous done alle ce matin, mon petit bonhomme ? vous n'etiez pas a Tecole, c'est mon petit doigt qui me Ta dit. 12. II est venu me dire de but en blanc que je n'etais pas bien eleve et qu^il allait cesser tout rapport avec moi. 76. 1. Does *^ he hope to blind me by such paltry artifices ? 2. At what hour shall I boil the water for tea ? 3. You surely would not be so bold as to ask him (for) a gold watch. 4. Are you quite sure that the door was bolted after you returned last night ? o. I was not hound to believe all his wonderful stories. 6. A fire broke out this morning in m}^ uncle's house. 7. He conquered a large province without striking a blow. 8. The arrival of that lady in the town always brings me good luckc 9. You shoukU^ not burst out laughing every time that gentleman speaks. 10. The poor girl burst into tears when she heard the sad news. 11. By the by, you have entirely forgotten to repay that money ^^ you bor- rowed. 12. To enter the room, the thieves broke the door open. 13. The best way to bring about what you EXERCISES. 117 wish would be to see the gentleman. 14. Could it not be brought about in any other way ? 15. You must not boil all the potatoes to-day. 16. It is three years since I began business, and I have succeeded pretty well. 17. That man brings ill-luck wherever he goes. 18. You are not bound to show him all the letters you receive, 19. They^^ were not at all well-bred people. 20. You have brought bad luck to our family 21. What did she burst into tears for ? 22. Is not your brother in a boarding school in London ? 23. That turkey is too large to be roasted ; you must boil it. 24. The new bank was burned to the ground. 25. She is too shy to speak to you first, you will certainly have to break the ice yourself. 77. (Section 9.) 1. Gardez-vous de vous lier avec lui; on a de graves soupcons sur son honneur. 2. On ne doit ni se moquer ni s'inquieter des qu'en dira-t-on. 3. Ce qu'il y a de certain, c'est que vous viendrez avec nous. 4. Je n'en suis pas bien certain, c'est selon. 5. Decidement, mon cher, vous vous ecoutez trop : hier vous n'avez rien fait de la journee, et aujourd'hui vous etes reste couche jusqu'a midi. 6. Prenez garde ; si vous n'avez soin de Yos habits, vous serez gfonde. 7. Vous devez etre en fonds maintenant ; il n'y a que trois jours que vous avez recu votre mois. 8. Chacun, dit La Eochefoucault, trouve a redire en autrui ce qu'on trouve a redire en lui. 9. C'est bien dur pour lui d'etre ainsi reduit a la mi sere ; autrefois il etait fort bien dans ses affaires. 10. Tout son mobilier est en vente ; si vous voulez Pacheter, vous I'aurez a bon compte. 11. Nous voici dans une vilaine 118 EXERCISES. passe ; comment nous tirerons-nous de la ? 12. Ne vous occupez pas de M. Louis ; c'est a M"'^ Louis qu'il faut vous adresser; M. Louis est un zero. 78. 1. I went last night to see the mistress of that girl; she gave her a very good character. 2. I happened to arrive before he did and get the situation. 3. Take care to do that exercise well. 4. You must take care what you do to that poor child. 5. When I get my salary, I shall be in funds for a week or two. 6. I caught him at it as I was passing. 7. As the case stands, you must leave to-night. 8. Perhaps I shall go with you ; that will depend on circumstances. 9. I don't care what people say if my conscience approves my actions. 10. He was in good circumstances three years ago. 11. I shall call on you before leaving town. 12. Ought he not to take care what he does in such a difficult affair ? 13. He took good care not ^to irritate the poor man. 14. I care for my honor more than for my money. 15. I caused that poor man to drink a glass of wine. 16. Why do you change your dress so many times, a day? 17. Don't stand on ceremony with us ; consider yourself at home. 18. I shall take care to inform him of that circumstance in my next letter. 19. I don't care whether ^^^ you walk or ride. 20. ShoukU^ she not call on the lady to thank her ? 21. Will you take care to thank him for me ? 22. I hope you don't waste your time in building castles in the air. 23. What did he cavil at ? 24. I cannot but acknowledge that we were both wrong. 25. It is very easy to see that he would like to make a cat's paw of me. EXERCISES. 119 79. (Section 10.) 1. Yous lie vous en tirerez pas si facilement que vous le pensez. 2. II est venii me trouver au moment oii je decaclietais votre lettre. 3. Apres tout^ est-ce que cela ne revient pas au meme ? 4. Fais ce que clois, advienne que pourra. 5. Mon cher, je yous felicite ; vous en etes quitte a bon marclie. 6. Ke vous etes-vous pas enrliumee hier soir en sortant de cliez nous? 7. Laissez-moi mon petit coin; voila trois ans que je I'occupe; si vous vous y mettiez, je ne serais pas a Taise de la soiree. 8. Je vais taclier de lui faire conter tout ce qu'il sait ; j'en aurai le coeur net. 9. Comme il sait faire patte de velours I 10. S'il ose me f rapper, je ne ferai ni une ni deux, je lui donnerai la monnaie de sa piece, et quel- que chose par-dessus le marclie. 11. C'est Ernest qui a remporte tons les premiers prix ; il est beaucoup plus fort que nioi dans toutes les branches; mais, en histoire et en geographic, je Tai serre de pres. 80. 1. You will not clap your hands so loudly when you hear "^ what your father says. 2. The weather has been extremely cold all this month. 3. Will you come to tea with us on Monday evening ? 4. She colors up when any one addresses her. 5. We did not get clear of the business so easily as you think. 6. AYill you come to me to-night at half-past five ? 7. Come what may, I did my best to ^^ succeed. 8. I shall not clear the table till ^^^ eveiT one has dined. 9. I have been so cold all day that I think I am going to be ill. 10. Poor fellow ! all his projects have come to nothing. 11. You did not 120 EXERCISES. come off with much, glory in that encounter. 12. Will it not come to the same thing if I pay you before? 13. How comes it that you are always too late for your dinner? 14. You were not so comfortable in your old house as (you are) in this one. 15. I had such a cold in my head it was impossible for me to sing. 16. I shall certainly catch cold if I am obliged to sit near this open window. 17. Has not the weather been colder this year than it was last year ? 18. When do you intend to come to see me? 19. Come along; it is clearing up; we shall have a fine walk. 20. How long have you had a cold ? 21. We came to an understanding before parting. 22. Let him come to me to-morrow at twelve o'clock. 23. I cannot get clear of that horrible confusion. 24. If you like^ we shall go and see him ; he lives close by. 25. How comes it that you sing (so) much better than you used to? 81. (Section 11.) 1. Qu'il s'en fait accroire, cet imbecile ! 2. Je vous ferai incessamment connaitre un fait qu'il vous importe beaucoup de savoir, 3. Auriez-vous, Monsieur,, la bonte de coucher ceci par ecrit ? c'est la coutume dans ce pays. 4. Ne vous derangez pas, je vous prie; je -m'y rendrai moi-meme, a moins que Faffaire ne vous regarde person- nellement. 5. Votre pendule est, ce me semble, en fort mauvais etat; elle vient de sonner dix-huit ou vingt heures. 6. N'allez pas lui manquer de respect au moins, c'est lui qui fait ici la pluie et le beau temps. 7. Quand vous voudrez, Monsieur, je suis a vos ordres. 8. Voyons, mettez la main sur la conscience, et dites-moi f ranchement si vous pensez que la conduite que vous tenez vous fait EXERCISES. 121 lionueiir. 9. Que pensez-YOus de mon cousin ? il n'a pas Fair d'avoir inveiite la poudre, n'est-ce pas ? 10. II perd facilement la carte ; lorsque ma femme lui a adresse la parole, il est reste bouche beante. 11. Que je prenne garde a moi, dites-vous, de peur qu^on ne repete ce que je dis ! cela m'est Men egal, c'est le moindre de mes soucis. 82. 1. I think he will not consent to do him even that small service. 2. He is ^^ a very conceited young man. 3. As my honor was concerned it was necessary for me to be present. 4. Was not your brother the second in com- mand in that engagement ? 5. You shall confine your- self to that ; it would be dangerous to excite him more. 6. It is of consequence to me that you should come. 7. It was of consequence to do that at once. 8. ISTow, sir, I am at your service; we shall go when you like. 9. Do not concern yourself about my affairs. 10. Would it not be of consequence to your father to have the letter early? 11. If my life is at stake, that is of great con- sequence. 12. You are not X3ursuing a (course of) con- duct tliat will please your friends. 13. Why should I not confide in those that have been so kind to me? 14. Do not confine yourself to that. 15. Do you think we should '^ confine ourselves to these orders ? 16. To complete my misery, I lost my w^ay in the forest. 17. You are too conceited, my friend. 18. Why do you concern yourself so much about things that do not con- cern you ? 19. If my honor is not concerned, I need not trouble myself about it. 20. Was he conscious of what he was saying at the time ? 21. It is of consequence to do well what we have to do. 22. I confided in his 122 EXERCISES. honor, and he has kept the secret. 23. The whole town was in a commotion on account of the elections. 24. A little bird told me that you had all been compelled to act together, in order to carry it through. 25. Did you notice how she tried to command a grave countenance ? 83. (Section 12.) 1. Vous m'avez defie de faire tomber la conversation sur ce sujet-la: eh Men, ne m'en suis-je pas tire avec honneur ? 2. En revenant, comme il faisait noir, il a pris un fosse plein d'eau pour un beau sentier, et il est alle se jeter dedans. 3. Comme vous etes de mauvaise humeur ce matin ! 4. Je n'ai pas dormi de la nuit, je n'ai fait que tousser. 6. II faut bien pen de chose pour le deconcert€r. 6. Voyons, ne me pressez pas tant, laissez-moi le temps de m'orienter. 7. C'est moi qui ferai les frais de son installation, coute que coute. 8. S'il m'obsede constamment de sa presence, nous aurons maille a partir ensemble. 9. C'est un monsieur qui n'a pas Tair d'y toucher, mais il en faut un plus malin que lui pour m'attraper. 10. II faisait nuit noire quand nous sommes arrives ; il n'y avait pas un chat dans les rues. 11. Si votre ami n'avait pas la tete un pen felee^, je lui donnerais du fil a retordre. 84. 1. You are constantly doing what you ought not (to do). 2. He turned the conversation to other subjects. 3. Don't tell such terrible stories again ; you make my flesh creep. 4. You are so cross, it is impossible to live EXERCISES. 123 with you. 5. I dared liim to make sucli a speech. 6. Why is the letter dated the 20th of September? 7. It will not be dark for an hour yet. 8. I dare you to approach me. 9. You cannot be in danger from that poor little beast. 10. How long has he been paying his court to that young lady ? 11. That is, of course, if you can afford it. 12. Don't speak of him to me ; Ave are at swords' points. 13. I shall turn the conversation to another subject immediately. 14. Keep yourself cool, here is your brother coming. 15. I daresay she will come, if her father is better. 16. You must not cough in the middle of my speech. 17. I fell in the mud, and was covered wHth it up to the eyes. 18. They used to lay all the travellers under contribution. 19. You are in no danger from that slight cold. 20. Will you please make a clear copy of these notes. 21. I am completely in the dark about their projects. 22. Few people are consistent with themselves. 23. We w^alked all day up hill and dowm dale. 24. You will do well to consider the thing twice before you promise. 25. Here is a letter saying she cannot come, that caps the climax of our disappointment. 85. (Section 13.) 1. II s'est 6te le pain< de la bouche pour vous donner une bonne education. 2. Ce ne sont pas les titres, c'est le travail et la vertu qui decident du merite ; ceux-ci dependent de nous, ceux-la dependent du hasard. 8. II ne depend pas de nous de n'etre pas pauvres, mais il depend de nous de faire respecter notre pauvrete. 4. Soyez tranquille; si Pon vous attaque, je suis la; je prendrai fait et cause pour vous. 5. Auriez-vous la 124 EXERCISES. bonte de lui remettre ce paquet en mains propres ? je me defie de ses domestiques. 6. Vous ne savez pas le prendre : avec de la douceur et des caresses vous le meneriez au bout du monde. 7. Vous etes un de ceux qui croient voir des etoiles en plein midi. 8. Hier on eut dit qu'il etait a deux doigts de la mort, mais main- tenant il n'est pas si mal a beaucoup pres. 9. Criez plus fort, elle est sourde comme un pot. 10. Nous buvions six ou huit verres d'eau minerale par jour, et nous allions prendre un bain de deux jours Tun. 11. II ne tient qu'a vous de venir avec nous ; le cheval est attele, nous partons dans cinq minutes. 86. 1. The letter bearing the date of the 21st of January never reached me. 2. I promise to call on him some day next week. 3. It will be broad daylight at five o'clock in the morning. 4. It is impossible to say to an hour when I return. 5. Can you tell me whose deal it is ? 6. He was put to death in the most cruel way. 7. She will be (found) deficient in skill at the last trial. 8. Some people delight in scandal. 9. His letter was not delivered in time. 10. You cannot depend upon a single word she says. 11. That depends upon circum- stances. 12. He deprived himself of many pleasures in order to give his children a good education. 13. My dear friend, it is time for you to decide ; we are leaving. 14. Some day next week you will hear from me. 15. She is an excellent servant, but you don't know how to deal with her. 16. Have you not deprived yourself of your fortune to assist your relations ? 17. Your account bearing the date of the 2d of November is wrong. 18. I hope those manners will soon go out of date. 19. Some EXERCISES. 125 evening next week we shall call on you. 20. It must have been broad daylight when they entered the house. 21. Could you not deliver the letter yourself? 22. I know to a day when he will arrive. 23. She is older than you; you should deal with her more politely. 24. We deemed it expedient tiD return as quickly as possible. 25. When your sister was with us^ she was the delight of the whole household.. 87. (Section 14.) 1. J'ai oublie de vous charger de lui faire mes compli- ments. 2. Quelle peine il a eue a s'arracher a cette mauvaise habitude ! 3. Quand vous lui ecrirez^ je vous prie de vouloir bien me rappeler a son bon souvenir. 4. Si vous lui rendez ce petit service, vous verrez qu'il se mettra en quatre pour vous. 5. Vous m'avez mis dans de beaux draps avec les histoires que vous etes alle lui conter. 6. Comment ! est-ce qu'on se rebute comme cela pour la moindre chose? 7. Laissez la cette besogne ; vous etes trop distrait ; vous ne faites rien qui vaille. 8. Cela ira bien quan4 je m'y serai mis tout de bon ; le tout est de m'y mettre. 9. Tl n'y a que le premier pas qui coute. 10. Vous finirez cela en deux ou trois jours ; ne dirait-on pas que c'est la mer a boire ? 11. Quand je la vois jouer ainsi a tort et a travers, sans raisonner ce qu'elle fait, cela me casse bras et jambes. 88. 1. You have had great difficulty in succeeding. 2. I served up dinner as soon as I was told. 3. Are not the streets dirty to-day ? Yes, very. 4. This dish invari- 126 EXERCISES. ably disagrees with me. 5. I was greatly disappointed in that affair. 6. This box will do for the one I lost. 7. You should have (nothing) to do with that man. 8. Please convey my kind regards to your father. 9. I think my brother is to dine out to-day. 10. Does not this close atmosphere disagree with your health? 11. He would not hurt a fly. 12. How dirty it is some- times in this quarter of the town! 13. This will do for a sail. 14. She has great difficulty in walking. 15. Give it to her, it makes no difference to me. 16. Do you not wish to send your kind regards to my brother ? 17. This fine weather should agree with your health. 18. Set about it at once; you will see that there will be no difficulty in the thing. 19. I cannot bring in the dinner till ^^^ your father comes. 20, Have you had any difficulty in procuring your brother a pension ? 21. He dismounted and came to embrace us. 22. You may do as you please, I have nothing to do with it. 23. He does nothing but sigh all day long. 24. We had invited those friends of yours to dinner on Thanksgiving Day, but they disappointed us. 25. You must do just as you please. 89. (Section 15.) 1. C'est assez comme cela, n'y touchez plus, c'est tout ce qu'il faut. 2. Je vous defie d'en faire autant. 3. Est-ce bien la tout ce qu'il faut ? ne vous trompez vous pas ? 4. Cette lettre m'a longtemps tenu au coeur. 5. Je ne pouvais me faire a Tidee que c'etait bien lui qui I'avait ecrite. 6. Faites en sorte de vous passer de sa societe ; cela n'en ira que mieux. 7. Je crois, ma cousine, que vous avez ensorcele cette petite bete ; elle ne pent pas EXEKCISES. 127 se passer de vous cinq minutes. 8. Vons qui faites Tentendu, je parie bien que vous n'en sauriez faire autant qu'elle. 9. Si vous ne lui donnez pas un bon pourboire, il vous mettra toute Faff aire sur le dos, vous pouvez j compter. 10. Si vous etes toujours la pres de moi, bavardant, riant et faisant du tapage, il n'y a pas moyen d'ecrire une ligne qui ait le sens commun. 11. Ou voulez- vous en venir avec toutes vos hesitations et toutes vos reticences ? 90. 1. That story has nothing to do with what we are saying. 2. I advise you not to drive him to extremities. 3. I can do without wine, if you give me pure water. 4. That will do ; say no more about it. 5. Will that do ? 6. He will bring upon himself a public rebuke. 7. The weather has not been so dry for many a day. 8. Did you not drop your handkerchief in the street? 9. Is it not your duty to fight when your country calls you? 10. You will have to do without luxuries when you emigrate. 11. If I have done wrong in reproaching you, I am sorry for it. 12. I should be doing right to expel him from the school. 13. My leaving ^' the town dwelt long upon his mind. 14. The cab drove over his leg. 15. I deem it a duty to tell her what has happened. 16. I should think you are double' my age. 17. I shall not dwell upon your misbehavior towards me. 18. I must drop this bag at the next corner. 19. Will it be dry enough to take a walk ? 20. What is to be done to prevent him from coming ? 21. That will not do. 22. Our neigh- bor's wife is dying. 23. Those questions are not for me to decide. 24. Let us draw lots to decide who shall go to the opera. 25. I dropped her acquaintance long ago. 128 EXERCISES, 91. (Section 16.) 1. N'etiez-vous pas en train de lier conversation avec elle lorsque je suis entre ? 2. Je vons ai adresse la parole, mais vons avez fait la sourde oreille. 3. Enfin, grace a vous, me voici a meme de quitter nn pays on j'allais perir. 4. Interrogez-les tonjours; ne lacliez pas prise ; ils finiront bien par Tavoner. 5. Faites done cesser cet affreux piano, voila trois heures que j'entends le commencement du meme air. 6. Le mot qui t'echappe est ton maitre; celui que tu retiens est ton esclave. 7. Le chien et le chat, ennemis Puri de Tautre, finis sent par vivre en bonne intelligence. 8. Pardon, Monsieur ; - c'est assez, c'est meme plus qu'il ne faut. 9. Yous en parlez bien a votre aise; il semble, avec vous, qu'il n^ ait qu'a se baisser et a en prendre. 10. Je ne sais ce que j'ai ce matin; je ne suis pas dans mon assiette. 11. II me semble que cette lettre, an lieu de vous lier les mains, vous laisse les coudees franches. 12. II faudra repasser plus tard, monsieur n'est pas visible. 92. 1. He turns a deaf ear to all that I say. 2. He is engaged in putting an end to that quarrel. 3. His friends will enable him to pay his debts. 4, If you say that, you will make an enemy of my wife. 6. We have enjoyed that drive very much. 6. Were they not en- gaged in writing ? 7. Let us not enter into conversation with her. 8. Will they not envy him his success ? 9. What else is there to do ? 10. He must have been very hungry, for he ate very heartily. 11. I regretted your absence very much ; there was, indeed, enough to EXERCISES. 129 laugh at. 12. Make yourself comfortable, that seat is good enough for ine. 13. Should you consent to treat him on a footing of equality ? 14. Let us endeavor to do our task well.^ 15. If you stop your ears, I won't speak any more. 16. She used to enliven the evenings with songs. 17. Be easy ; he always enjoys himself well. 18. They will not be so enraged against him. 19. We shall end by forgiving her. 20. Are you in good earnest when you say that you give an entertainment to-night ? 21. She is a very able woman, one who is always equal to any emergency. 22. He whispered in my ear that he expected to be married shortly. 23. Mary was very much excited because you told her that she had not done an earthly thing all this last week. 24. He is still engaged in writing that book, there seems to be no end of it. 25. That child has a good ear for music. 93. (Section 17.) 1. n etait temps que je vinsse a son secours, elle n'en pouvait plus. 2. Elle pent se vanter de Pavoir echappe belle. 3. Vous croyez qu'il se repentira; ne vous y attendez pas; il vous poussera a bout comme tout le monde. 4. Allons, ne vous faites pas prier ; venez avec nous ; c'est votre oncle" qui fait les frais de cette partie de plaisir. 5. Celui qui passe dans la paresse la pre- miere partie de sa vie, ne doit pas s'attendre a se reposer dans la vieillesse. 6. Vous y regardez d'un pen trop pres; avec vous il faut toujours mettre les points sur les i. 7. Pendant Pete, lorsque les classes sont fermees, lisez quelque bon livre franqais, et tachez de faire men- talement quelques phrases tons les jours ; cela vous 130 EXEECISES. tiendra en lialeine. 8. Eepondre a une question par line autre, c'est repondre a Pecossaise; repondre sans rien dire, c'est repondre en Normand. 9. II a fait tons ses efforts pour vous etre agreable ; il f aut lui savoir gre de sa bonne volonte. 10. Elle a ouvert de grands yeux en revoyant Eugene, qu'elle croyait mort depuis plusieurs annees. 11. Ce qu'il m'a dit la est une defaite ; je suis stir qu^il a touche I'argent. 94. 1. I had a narrow escape last night. 2. You will be exhausted like myself, if you go so far. 3. He hopes that I shall defray the expense of my journey. 4. Let him not expect that. 5. It will be very expensive. 6. They exhausted my patience at last. 7. You would set greater value on that book if you were able to under- stand it. 8. Your account is right, with that exception. 9. I was at considerable expense to ^^ procure him that pleasure. 10. You excite my compassion, but I cannot help you; I am quite exhausted. 11. Do not set any value on her favor ; she is capricious. 12. I expected so. 13. He is a hypocrite whom you must ■ expose. 14. He endeavors to catch the eye of everybody. 15. He hoped you would be a witness for him in that unfortu- nate circumstance. 16. The wickedness and cunning of that lawyer are far beyond expression. 17. Never ask him here ; he is an eyesore to me. 18. My uncle used to give me five francs a month for my petty ex- penses. 19. Is it not he who defrayed the expenses of your education ? 20. Yes ; nobody has ever evinced more kindness and generosity. 21. I shall never be even with him. 22. It will be a very expensive education. EXERCISES. 131 23. Her eyes were fairly starting out of her head with surprise. 24. You must take exception to her state- ments, she always runs from one extreme to the other. 25. It is very rude to eye people from head to foot. 95. (Section 18.) 1. C'est hier qu'on a fait Pelection des officiers, et il ne tenait qu'a moi d'etre lieutenant. 2. Je ne Pai pas voulu pour ne pas avoir affaire au capitaine Martin, car il y a trois ans nous nous sommes querelles a propos de bottes. 3. II s'en faut de beaucoup qu'il soit aussi fier que vous le pensez. 4. N'allez pas donner dans ces modes-la; c'est de Pextra^vagance toute pure. 5. II a su lui faire face. 6. C'est vrai, ma chere niece, voila de tres-belle dentelle, mais ce n'est pas pour vos beaux yeux. 7. II faut avoir du front pour oser se presenter dans le monde apres un tel esclandre. 8. C'est une vraie poule mouillee que votre petit cousin ; il a peur de son ombre. 9. C'est pour la fete d'hier que j'avais commande cet habit ; reprenez-le ; c'est de la moutarde apres diner. 10. II est ecrit qu'on ne me laissera pas une minute de repos. 11. Elle m'a annonce cela a brule pourpoint. 96. 1. The soldiers faced the enemy bravely. 2. The troops fell into the ambuscade. 3= I am far from wish- ing that. 4. I must bid farewell to my sisters. 5. We failed in spite of our efforts. 6. The tiger feeds on flesh. T. They felt almost offended at your remarks. 8. Would they really quarrel about such a trifle ? their 132 EXEKCISES. friends would be far from approving it. 9. Will that watch go too fast if I touch it ? 10. That dress is no longer in fashion. 11. Do you not feel reluctant to speak to him of all that ? 12. We would not fall into that snare so easily as you. 13. He quarrelled with his father about the lady to whom he had taken a fancy. 14. It will be your fault if you fail. 15. All this is very fair, but tell me the pretext of their quarrel. 16. She is in great fear of me. 17. Do not forget to go and bid farewell to your cousin before you go. 18. My watch is too fast by five minutes. 19. For three months we were constantly on the lookout. 20. It was so dark in church that we had to feel our way. 21. We were so hungry that we fell upon everything we could find. 22. I was surprised to see them on such familiar terms. 23. We shall esteem it a favor if you will come and dine with us a week from to-day. 24. When will they lay the corner stone of the new city hall ? 25. Those flowers are faded, throw them away. 97. (Section 19.) 1. Ne vous attristez pas ; le temps va se remettre au beau; voyez, le vent emporte tons les nuages. 2. La pauvre fille a le coeur gros ; je lui ai dit que sa tante ne viendrait pas la prendre cet apres-midi. 3. C'est cette petite affaire qui, tournant en insurrection, a mis le feu a toute FEurope. 4. On Tavait accuse de lachete, mais il a bravement paye de sa personne dans cette bataille. 5. Ne me parlez pas d'Honore ; c'est un triste sire il est egoiste, faux et vaniteux. 6. Allez faire un petit tour sur le bord de la mer, et vous verrez que votre migraine EXERCISES. 133 s'en trouvera mieux. 7. Depechez-vous de repondre a sa question, ou il trouvera bien le moyen de yous laire parler. 8. II s'est precipite au fort de la melee, et s'est battu corps a corps avec le general ennemi. 9. Est-ce que vous m'en voulez pour cela ? est-ce le calomnier que de dire qu'il n'a pas invente la poudre ? 10. J^ai vu passer votre frere dans son nouvel uniforme ; il avait fort bonne mine, et j'entendais dire autour de moi qu'il etait beau comme un astre. 11. Si vous allez repeter cette liistoire a tout bout de champ, vous vous en mordrez les doigts, c'est moi qui vous le predis. 98. 1. Henry is a good fellow, but his brother is a bad fellow. 2. Come and take her for a walk, then go and fetch the doctor. 3. When it is ^^ fine again, we shall go. 4. Do not set fire to that paper. 5. If you drink two or three glasses of that water every morning, you will find yourself much the better for it. 6. Kow she feels sick at heart, because the money is lost. 7. Your brother always has his French lesson at his lingers' ends. 8. Will he not go and bring me the book I spoke of ? 9. Xo, he will take it amiss if you ask it again. 10. All those reproaches are unjust, I don't care a fig for them. 11. We fcfund it worth our while to sell our land. 12. I fear they may set fire to the house. 13. Come and fetch me at half-past two. 14. What would you do if she suddenly felt sick ? 15. Be a good fellow and write your exercise. 16. You should go and take a walk when the weather is so fine. 17. It has just rained, but the weather has set in fine again. 18. Do not go ; *^ she is better. 19. They wasted the western 134 EXERCISES. provinces by fire and sword. 20. Pray do not take it amiss if I do not go out with you ; I must not. 21. Shall you find it worth while to stand in line for an hour and a half ? 22. During the sermon you could have heard a pin drop. 23. Say what you will^ but you know that your hands are not fettered. 24. I had no money about me, consequently there was no book to be had. 25. We are very far from being ready to start. 99. (Section 20.) 1. Si c'est pour rire que vous Favez fait, je vous par- donne, mais que je ne vous y reprenne plus. 2. Tout ce que je desire maintenant, c'est qu'il me fasse parvenir ce paquet au moins une heure avant mon depart. 3. Je m'etonne que ses parents le laissent s'etablir; il va manger toute sa fortune, il ne voit pas plus loin que son nez. 4. Si vous persistez encore quelques semaines dans vos bonnes resolutions, vous recueillerez les fruits de votre perseverance. 5. Comment ! c'est a ce pauvre garcon que vous en voulez, mais il se mettrait au feu pour vous ! 6. II faut pourtant que cela finisse; je vais aller trouver votre frere et le mettre au pied du mur. 7. Si vous lui laissez prendre tant de libertes, bientot il vous manger a la laine sur le dos. 8. Le pauvre gargon est malheureux, mais il fait contre fortune bon coeur. 9. Ce qu'il y a de bon avec vous autres Anglais, c'est qu'on a toujours son franc parler. 10. II gele a pierre fendre depuis hier matin; je suis sur que la riviere est deja prise. 11. A Pavenir vous aurez soin de le payer rubis sur Pongle; n'oubliez pas que les bons comptes font les bons amis. EXERCISES. 135 100. 1. He fired at liim at once. 2. Yes^ but the other held firm. 3. At first he expected to frighten hira. 4. I thought he was doing it for fun. 5. AYill you not make friends with us before leaving ? 6. If it is foggy in the morning, we shall not go. 7. We are extremely fond of music. 8. His laugh is forced. 9. I know you are doing it for fun, but you are frightening her to death. 10. It is for fun they did it. 11. That hat does noj: fit you at all. 12. I liked that preacher from the very first ; he is so free from affectation. 13. ISTever ridicule old age or infirmity. 14. He was passionately fond of his children. 15. For all that he often frightened them, and would '^ never make friends with his daughter who had left his house. 16. Will you hold that ladder firm till I come down ? 17. Here is the small sum I owed you, now we are quits and friends. 18. Allow me to say this is not done like a friend, and that I am astonished at your conduct. 19. I heard my father say, that the reading of that book was forbidden by the Church. 20. He succeeds in everything because he always takes time by the forelock. 21. The library, the kitchen, and the dining-room are all on the same floor ; I wish it could be otherwise. 22. T shall never forget as long as I live how he fretted alid fumed when he heard that his brother was trying to pass himself off for a marquis. 23. It will be better to say nothing about that. 24. The poor woman missed her footing and fell the whole length of the stairs. 25. I hope that in future you will try to forget and forgive. 26. The tailor has just sent his new coat, and it fits like a glove, but it does not follow that he will be suited. 136 EXERCISES. 101. (Section 21.) 1. Cette robe que vous trouvez si chere, je vous la ferai avoir presque pour rien. 2. EUe s'en est fort bien tiree : qu'en pensez-vous ? 3. C'est un liomme qui sait vivre, on voit qu'il a frequente le meilleur monde. 4. Le moyen de se defaire d\in ennemi est d^en faire un ami. 6. II faudra que je me fasse faire deux ou trois paires de chaussures avant de me mettre en voyage. 6. Eh bien^ M. votre pere vous a bien gronde, n'est-ce pas ? voila ce que c'est que d'etre paresseux. 7. J'ai envie de partir avec ce monsieur pour Paris ; il me promet monts et merveilles. 8. Oui, attendez-vous-y! 9. Que desirez-vous, demandait Alexandre a Diogene ? que vous vous otiez de devant mon soleil, repondit le philosophe. 10. Cette litterature me semblait d'abord triste, froide et monotone, mais maintenant j'y prends gout. 11. Voici deja trois heures qui sonnent ; je vais etre en retard pour mon rendez-vous; adieu, je me sauve. 102. 1. He is quite a gentleman. 2. I shall get that place for you if we are not too late. 3. You will not gain your point at the very first. 4. Your brother set out last night for England, did he not ? I hope he will gain his object. 5. I got home rather late, and found the door shut. 6. We get on slowly. He will never make his way in the world. 7. Yes, I am beginning to get rich. 8. If you can get me that situation, I will give you five hundred francs. 9. Get rid of that dog ; he does nothing but bark the whole night. 10. Let EXERCISES. 137 as go away ; it is getting late. 11. Of whom are you making game ? 12. His coat got torn in the wood. 13. That novel gets more and more interesting. 14. Do yon know your friend has got on very well ? 15. Get on ; if you always stop, we shall never arrive. 16. Your head is so large that you should order a hat for yourself. 17. Get a third class ticket for me, and get into the train quickly, it will'^ leave immediately. 18. She is getting melancholy. 19. The goods got damaged by fire. 20. She gained her point by using the greatest prudence. 21. I am happy to hear you got clear of that difficulty. 22. Do take pity on that wretched dog and give him something to eat. 23. Something good must have happened, for you are as gay as a lark to-day. 24. It has been so cold here that the river is frozen over. 25. We can almost see that plant grow from one day to another. 103. (Section 22.) 1. Otez-vous de la, s'il vous plait; c'est ma place. 2. Un Spartiate etait puni s'il se livrait aux plaisirs de la table. 3. Vous ne asuriez croire a combien de sup- positions, d'inventions, de calomnies et de mensonges ce brusque depart a donne lieu. 4. Est-ce que vous croyez que je me tiens pour battu parce que vous me refusez votre appui ? 5. Quand on a de Pesprit, on se tire d'affaire. 6. S'il continue a m'impatienter de la sorte, je lui donnerai du fil a retordre, qu'il y compte ! 7. II me semble que c'est s'arreter en beau chemin. 8. S'il ose jamais vous reprocher la lettre que vous lui avez ecrite, c'est moi qui lui dirai son fait. 9. Les amis que 138 EXERCISES. vous vous etes faits dans la prosperite ne vous serviront pas tons dans le malhenr. 10. II a vonln me dorer la pilnle, mais j'ai compris TafEaire dii premier conp. 11. II m'est impossible de deviner : je jette ma langne aux cliiens. 12. Le professeur nous a tons tances d'impor- tance, ancun de nous n'avait fini ses devoirs. 104. 1. My annt gives an evening party on Tlinrsday. 2. Did yon give him occasion to find fault with your conduct ? 3. How stout you are getting ! 4. On her return, her mamma gave her a long lecture. 5. Get out of the way immediately. 6. He promised to give us an account of all that has passed. 7. Will you give us an account of your adventures in California? 8. I must give in my account once a^ month. 9. It is easier to get into a scra^oe than to get out of it. 10. Do you give credit to all he tells you ? 11. Do not give him occasion to give you a lecture. 12. His going away ^' will give rise to evil reports. 13. Since his death she has given herself up to despair. 14. I shall give an evening party on my birthday. 15. The affair is getting more confused every day ; you had better give it up. 16. His farmers used to give in their accounts twice a year. - 17. Every night I gave her an account of what I had heard. 18. On receipt of the money, he will give himself up to every kind of extravagance. 19. If you give up such a promis- ing affair, what will people think of you ? 20. By so doing you gave her the advantage over you. 21. Your father is most generous, he gives largely to all the needy. 22. We start on our journey the 16th of August, and we return sometime in the winter. 23. You would hardly EXERCISES. 139 believe the pleasure it gave me to see them all so well and prosperous. 24. I was very near falling into the river. 25. People who are always finding fault with everything are very tiresome. 105. (Section 23.) 1. Ne vous fiez pas tant a ses belles manieres ; elle s,'est oubliee, I'autre jour, jusqu'a me reprocher les cinq livres que j'ai voulu lui emprunter et qu'elle ne m'a pas pretees. 2. Xe viendrez-vous pas au-devant de moi quand j'irai vous voir ? 3. Elle avait deux milles a faire a pied tous les soirs et tous les matins. 4. Quand il se laisse aller a la colere, il ne se possede plus, il est comme enrage. 5. Xous etions vingt-cinq ou trente, et nous avons tous bu dans le meme verre. 6. Voyez comme les petites filles sont naturellement coquettes ; voila la troisieme f ois que cette enfant va se mirer depuis un quart d'heure. 7. Louis et Gustave sont comme les deux doigts de la main ; il n'y a rien de tel qu'un mal- heur commun pour vous rendre amis intimes. 8. Com- ment a-t-il ose se presenter chez son pere, dites-vous ? parce qu'il salt que son pere ne pent se passer de lui. 9. Yous avez beau vous moquer de moi, j'ai dit que . je lirais toute ^^'THist^ire de TEurope," et je ne m'en dedirai pas. 10. Je vols, mon cher Monsieur, que vous vous abandonnez facilement a vos passions; cela vous menera loin. 11. Devinez qui s'est approche de moi dans le pare avec I'intention evidente de me parler ; je vous le donne en cent. 12. Vous pouvez vous her a ses promesses, c'est de Tor en barre. 13. Yous allez au devant de mon amie, c'est tres aimable de votre part. 140 EXERCISES. 106. 1. I was going on sure grounds when I said that. 2. Never give way to your passions. 3. She went a mile of the way with me. 4. The}^ gave no credit to his assertions. 5. Go to your cousin and invite her to come here. 6. Don't ask him anything^ he is not worth a groat. 7. I was glad to hear of your safe arrival at Rotterdam. 8. While I was going up stairs I heard a knock at the door. 9. They go along without stopping anywhere. 10. I used to go for my cousin every day. 11. Do you go so far as to say that to me, sir ? 12. I should go to my uncle's to-morrow if I were asked. 13. I shall go the whole ten miles with you. 14. We were falling short of provisions, when 8000 men came to the rescue of the town. 15. Go down stairs and tell the cook I want her. 16. It would be of no ava,il; he would go on in the same way. 17. Since your brother played me that trick, I have owed him a grudge. 18. Will you go to your mother with a message from ^ me ? 19. You might go for a chair for me. 20. That is just what he glories in. 21. I was always glad to hear that she was coming to see us. 22. I went to meet my brother at the station. 23. Here is that precious bonbon box which you had given up for lost ; some time you will learn not to grieve for trifles. 24. • He used to be a fine cabinet maker, but now he is growing old. 25. It grieves me to tell you that she played truant. 107. (Section 24.) 1. II a perdu sa place, il fait pitie a present, il vit an jour le jour. 2. Je n'y suis pas encore, vous feriez EXERCISES. 141 mieux de me le dire sans plus de delai. 3. Vous n'y etes pas, vous en etes a cent lieues. 4. Ce n'est pas a moi qu'il faut vous plaindre de votre mesaventure^ je n'y suis pour rien. 5. J'ai failli avoir le pied ecrase par une roue de voiture ; il ne s'en est j)^s fallu de I'epaisseur d'un clieveu. 6. Je crois qu'il est a Paris et que son oncle le mene un pen rondement. 7. II ne faut pas lui laisser prendre ce mauvais pli; corrigez-le a temps. 8. S'll venait avec moi, il m'ennuierait de ses sottes questions tout le long du chemin; je ne veux pas de lui. 9. C'est tres-facile jusqu'a present, mais, quand vous en viendrez aux verbes, vous m'en direz des nou- velles ; c'est la que je vous attends. 10. Si vous n'etes pour rien dans cette mallieureuse affaire, je me fais fort de vous faire avoir la place que vous sollicitez. 11. Sa liberte ne tient plus qu'a un fil ; si vous me donnez un coup de main, a nous deux nous obtiendrons sa grace avant un mois. 12. Voulez-vous bien vous taire avec toutes ces horribles histoires ? vous me faites dresser les cheveux sur la tete. 108. 1. I am in the habit of writing two hours daily. 2. If he happens to know that you came with me, he will be very angry. 3. I was hardly able to believe what he said. 4. They had difficulty in believing him. 5. You have guessed rightly; you have it now. 6. The best thing we can do is ^^ to set out at once. 7. They had better tell the truth. 8. Beware of these two swindlers, they go hand in hand. 9. You would have done better to do without it. 10. I have it, I know how to manage him now. 11. How does it happen that you did not go to meet your mother ? 12. It hurts me to see you 142 EXERCISES. suffer so. 13. The best thing these gentlemen can do is to be quiet. 14. The tears were in her eyes when she shook hands with me. 15. I will have no hand in it, I assure you. 16. He has too much on his hands at present. 17. Eorgive me. I meant no harm. 18. You could hardly be ready in time. 19. I shall have my hair cut. 20. He has it ; he has found out the reason. 21. Unless he has it on good authority, he will not be- lieve it. 22. What do think it will be best for me to do? 23. You ask if they are on friendly terms now; I should say so, they are hand in glove. 24. When he found how he had been imposed upon by that swindler, he tore his hair with rage. 25. Ko, you have not guessed right yet, you are very far from it. 109. (Section 25.) 1. II faut battre le fer quand il est chaud. 2. Quelle idee s'est-elle mise en tete de partir ainsi a Timproviste ! 3. Courez apres lui, vous le rattraperez; il ne fait que de partir. 4. La fatale nouvelle nous est arrivee comme nous sortions de table. 5. Je lui en toucherai deux mots ce soir. 6. Vous avez mis le doigt dessus; c'est bien la la cause de son eloignement pour lui. 7. EUe me Ta fait entendre ce matin d\uie maniere a ne pas m'y tromper. 8. Aussitot qu'il a vu son pere, il a pris ses jambes a son cou. 9. II y a vraiment de quoi se facher quand on voit une pareille lettre ; Qa n'a ni queue ni tete. 10. Que voulez-vous qu'on y fasse ? s'il veut absolument partir, laissez-le faire. 11. Un peu de pa- tience, s'il vous plait; il me semble que vous y allez bien a la legere. EXERCISES. 143 110. 1. 1 think you have something to do with it. 2. With whom have you to do ? 3. He will have heard from them by this time. 4. Have you heard that the queen is coming ? 5. Should we not be too warm there ? 6. If she takes it into her head to stay at home, we shall be very glad. 7. It would be very hot in this room if the windows were not open. 8. They had but just dined when she came in. 9. We should have heard the news by this time. 10. Had you not just called at their house? 11. I have but just arrived from Paris. 12. AYill you give me a hint what I ought to do ? 13. They can- not come with us, they have company to-night. 14. They have heard it said that he is a bankrupt. 15. We have never heard it said. 16. We should be too hungry if we waited till ten o'clock. 17. I had heard that said by his enemies. 18. He hurt my arm with his cane. 19. And everybody spoke so highly of him ; I presume the family will try to hush up the affair. 20. I could not help saying: ^^ Heaven forbid that he should have designs on your position ! '' 21. There was a very full house at the concert last night. 22. I told her there was no hurry about finishing that dress, because it grieved me to see her look so ilL 23. Last Shrove Tues- day he disguised himself as a minstrel, and had great success. 24. How cah we help it, if he takes it into his head to go ? 26. Did you enjoy the country last summer ? 111. (Section 26.) 1. On vous a jete de la poudre aux yeux, et on vous a fait accroire tout ce qu'on a voulu. 2. Si vous tenez 144 EXERCISES. absolument a kii reprocher son inconduite, prenez bien garde de I'offenser ; il a la tete pres du bonnet. 3. Je vous ferai bien avoir cette affaire^ si vous j tenez. 4. lis s'en sont joliment donne; ils n'ont fait qne jouer toute la journee ; c'etait a qui se ferait le plus de niches. 5. Vous ne pouvez pas vous faire une idee du monde qui se pressait autour de ce charlatan, 6. Auriez-vous la bonte dialler a vos heures perdues prendre quelques renseignements sur ce jeune. homme ? 7. C'est une guerre a coup d'epingles qu'on vous fait depuis trois ans. 8. Je vous accompagnerais bien volontiers a Paris^~ si vous ne me trouviez pas de trop. 9. Le monsieur dont vous parlez est fort a son aise. il vit de ses rentes. 10. Vous oubliez que c'est a ma mere que vous etes redevable de la position que vous occupez. 11. Pour pen que vous insistiez avec politesse, vous le mettrez certainement dans vos interets. 112. 1. He is not inclined to go there^ yet if he stays a little while, that will please them. 2. I have no intention of injuring him. 3. Do you not intend to return that book ? 4. If they had rema^ined but a little longer, they would have seen the review. 6. If she were -not so hard of hearing as she is, they would not so easily impose on her. 6. Do you believe I shall remain inactive all day ? 7. Do not fear to apply to him ; he will be indefatigable in his efforts for you. 8. They have foolishly incurred that reproach. 9. I will thank you to make some inquiries about her. 10. Let us inquire into that story. 11. We will introduce you to him, if you wish. 12. Is it not he who attends to your interest ? Then I may EXERCISES. 145 rely upon him. 13. You must not interrupt me so. 14. She improves in her studies^ but not in her manners ; she is very impudent. 15. It has been hard to find him at home, he is in and out all day long. 16. If you feel like it, do come with us to that picnic. 17. Shall I intrude if I ask to accompany you on that walk ? 18. I have known him for a long time, he always works like that, without intermission. 19. Everything is topsy- turvy in this room, even the table cover is wrong side out. 20. She plays on the harp only when she feels like it. 21. You will have to play cards every evening, you might as well be resigned to it. 22. It is time indeed to begin, for I have a lot of things to do. 23. I live in the country and I enjoy it very much. 24. We had a lovely time at your uncle's house ; we were treated like princes. 25. He called me a good-for-nothing fellow. 113. (Section 27.) 1. Pardonnez-moi, Monsieur, je crois que vous ne vous connaissez guere en peinture. 2. Les domains avaient un excellent proverbe — '^ Que le savetier s'en tienne a sa savate ! " 3. Ayez bien soin de me faire dire le jour et Fheure de votre depart. 4. Vous pouvez y compter, mais, de votre cote, ne me faites pas attendre. 5. EUe n'est pas si sotte que de partir a votre insu. 6. Je le connais de longue main; il veut toujours en faire a sa tete, mais il s'en mordra les pouces. 7. Continiiez d'ecrire; pendant ce temps je leur conterai la petite histoire que j'ai gardee pour la bonne bouche. 8. Est-il bien vrai qu'il roule maintenant carrosse ? ce n'est pas pour rire que vous dites cela ? 9. Je le reconnais a sa L 146 EXERCISES. voix ; c'est lui ; gardez votre sang-froid. 10. Seriez-vous assez bon pour lui dire cela de ma part ? 11. II a, dit-on, trois domestiques maintenant, et hier il avait a peine de quoi vivre. 12. lis ne se feront pas faute de profiter de la bonne occasion qui se presente. 114. 1. Would you be so kind as to ring the bell to let him know that she is coming. 2. Are 3^ou not joking in saying that you are going to take a journey into Spain? 3. They know how to take a jest^ don't they? 4. Are you a judge of music ? 5. I know it thoroughly. 6. He says just as you (say). 7. Did you not tell me you knew that gentleman? I know him by sight only. 8. l^hey have had the kindness to let me know their plans in time. 9. We shall keep them waiting till we are ready. 10. If your watch keeps time better than mine, will you tell me what o'clock it is ? 11. Did you do it without the knowledge of your father ? 12. She knows better than you think. 13. Be kind to the orphans. 14. They will begin their journey to-morrow morning. 15. Keep to that, and don't lose your wits. 16. If any one understands the art of killing two birds with one stone, it is you. 17. Hurry up, and tell me all about it, you are killing me by inches with your hesitation. 18. John went back on his resolution in the most absurd way. 19. He spent the greater part of his money in no time at all, and for trifles. 20. We gave the poor animal the finishing stroke, there was nothing else to do. 21. We escaped under cover of the night. 22. I was out of all patience with the blustering of that fire-eater. 23. He's a tremendous eater, although EXERCISES. 147 he's as thin as a rail. 24. Your maid is exceedingly neat in her dress. 25. Do not keep me waiting, please. 115. (Section 28.) 1. Jean, si Ton rit et si I'on fait du bruit, c'est a vous que je m'en prendrai. 2. J'ai pense tomber. 3. Est-ce la tout ce qu'il vous reste, 3 fr. 35 cent ? 4. iSTous avons tons failli perir dans le port. 5. Les deux freres sont jumeaux et se ressemblent comnie deux gouttes d'eau. 6. Quant a elle, eile vivote comme elle pent ; elle a bien de la peine a joindre les deux bouts ensemble. 7. Mourir pour mourir, il vaut mieux mourir en combattant qu'en f uyant. 8. Yous y reconnaissez-vous maintenant ? voyez- vous ou vous etes ? Pas le moins du monde. 9. Passe pour cette fois, mais tachez qu'on ne vous y revoie plus. 10. Je ne voudrais pas, pour tout au monde, preter a rire a ces deux filles ; elles sont trop malignes. 11. Yous riez jaune, M. I'usurier ; je parie dix contre un qu'on YOUS a paye en monnaie de singe. 12. Je vous conseille de garder une poire pour la soif et de n^y toucher qu^a la derniere extremite. 116. 1. It was broad daylight this morning at five o'clock. 2. AYell, he will leave you in the lurch. 3. The room was about twelve yards in length by eight in breadth. 4. I have only nine pounds left. 5. If you do not succeed, my dear sir, do not lay it to me. 6. He will leave it to you, so do just as you please. 7. I think she will lay the cloth in the parlor. 8. They were like to fall from the mast. 9. I shall only have six days left 148 EXERCISES. to wait. 10. I was like to laugh in his face. 11. Let my papers alone ; you will put them in disorder. 12. It was not daylight when she let the dog out. 13. She laughed in the face of the people when they tried to throw the blame on her. 14. They have three horses left. 15. Do not speak to him ; leave him alone. 16. They were like to die of sea-sickness. 17. He reproached me for having been laid up for a week. 18. Never mind ; don't pay attention to what he says. 19. He left no stone unturned to gain his ends. 20. You must acknowledge that he led a fast life. 21. Set that bird free^ please, even if Mary does not like it. 22. During his lifetime, he was only too inclined to resist his father. 23. Don't you consider that servant faithful ? 24. We had almost lost our wits, our imaginations were haunted with all sorts of misgivings. 25. He was sincere when he took the opposite stand under the late government. 117. (Section 29.) 1. La paresse chemine si lentement que la pauvrete ne tarde pas a Tatteindre. 2. Que vous avez tarde a venir ! 3. Qu'il a Pair bete ! 4. Si vous pouvez, Mon- . sieur, me preter un pen d' argent, tant soit pen, je vous en serai reconnaissant toute ma vie. 5. Je vous reconnais bien la; toutes les fois que je vous vois, c'est la meme chanson. 6. Si le coeur vous en dit, nous irons passer le reste de la journee a Versailles. 7. Attendez un moment que ie jette ce mot a la poste, et je suis a vous. 8. Au lieu de mettre mon argent sous clef, j'ai prie la maitresse de Thotel de vouloir bien me le garder. 9. II gagne sa vie selon toute apparence. 10. Je vous en EXERCISES. 149 clemanderai an fur et a mesure que j'en aurai besoin. 11. Vous me manquez de plus eu plus chaque jour. 118. 1. She looks sulky to-day. 2. Does your father look as well as usual ? 3. They all look sickly. 4. I long to see them all. 5. They are very long in coming. 6. Your brother listens to reason, but you do not. 7. I should like to know who told you that, f or it is not likely that they can come so soon. 8. We once lived close by. 9. You look as if you had a headache. 10. She looked very well when I saw her last. 11. He was longing to see his mother;, well she will not be long in coming. 12. It is not likely that it will be fine weather to-morrow, it is so foggy to-day. 13. Will you listen to reason or not ? 14. He appears (to be a) rich (man). 15. How long will it be before you are ready ? 16. If you are long in going out, you will lose sight of her. 17. They look as if they were coming this way. 18. You must have missed your sister very much during that long absence. 19. This constant hubbub becomes unendurable in the long run. 20. I almost missed the ten twenty train to Boston. 21. Much good it would do you to try and put a stop to it. 22. Truth is sometimes disagree- able to hear. 23. I cannot tell you how much we missed you. 24. Most things have a comical side to them. 25. I am so tired of that everlasting song. 119. (Section 30.) 1. Je crois que deux de vos fenetres donnent sur le pare ; vous devez avoir de la une fort belle vue. 2. Quelle 150 EXERCISES. fete je me fais de vous avoir chez nous tout Tete ! 3. Je ne me fie pas beaucoup a cet Individ u, ne le perdez pas de vue. 4. Tout a cou]p il n'a plus, su que dire et est rest-e bouche beante. 5. Allez faire un tour, vous n'etes pas en veine. 6. Quelle fete nous nous faisions de la voir cet ete, et quel desappointement ! 7. Tons ces gens-la se sont depuis longtemps perdus de reputation, ne remettez plus les pieds chez eux. 8. II la croit sotte, et moi je lui trouve un air fort eveille. 9. Vous en etes pour votre argent, et moi pour ma place. 10. Que veut-il done dire avec cette lettre ? je n'y comprends plus rien ; je m'y perds. 11. Malgre mon guignon, je ne me tiens pas encore pour batta; allez toujours. 120. 1. She will look after the house and bring him good luck. 2. If your parasol has not yet been returned,^^ you may give it up for lost. 3. I shall look in on my way to the station. 4. Has he not ruined his reputation ? 5. I knew that she was looking forward with pleasure to our visit. 6, Don't lose sight of him ; I am afraid he will rob you. 7. He who is lucky at cards is unlucky in marriage. 8. You lose your temper for nothing. 9. Be kind enough to look after my dog when'^ I am away. 10. Are you not looking forward with pleasure to hearing soon from your father ? 11. I shall try to find a house which looks toward the hills. 12. When he meets me, he is at a loss what to say. 13. Don't look any more for it; it is evidently lost. 14. When one speaks to him, he loses his self-possession. 15. The loss I have sustained is not very considerable. 16. Now that his partner is dead, he is at a loss what to do. EXERCISES. 151 17. He who looks for perfect happiness in this world, is mistaken. 18. Look to that, if you please. 19. He had warned us that he wanted to go to the war, and he did go in good earnest. 20. Your mother always sees everything in a favorable light. 21. Gently, gently, don't go so fast. 22. You had a narrow escape when that boat took lire. 23. He had promised never to gamble, but he has begun again worse than ever. 24. You should not have given her the slip when you were invited there to dinner. 2o. I did not do it purposely. 26. We are all looking forward to your visit with the greatest pleasure. 121. (Section 31.) 1. On ne pourra se servir de cet ouvrage sans une table des matieres exacte et methodique. 2. Faites-lui place pres de vous, et reconciliez-vous tout de suite. 3. Si vous faites tant d^embarras, vous ne pourrez jamais tirer parti de vos talents. 4. Le chagrin Pa rendu vieux avant la vieillesse. • 5. N'allez pas faire un coup de tete a Paris ; soyez bien sage et ecrivez-nous. 6. On les a extermines les uns apres les autres ; ils y ont passe tons jusqu'au dernier. 7. J'enrage de penser que mon coquin de neveu a encore fait des siennes. 8. Vous voyez que maintenant je parle Italien; je Testropie bien un pen, mais cela va tout de meme. 9. C'est un homme comme on n'en voit guere ; il a fort habilement mene sa barque par une mer tres-difficile. 10. II faut que ces gens-la aient perdu la tete ; comment ont-ils pu avancer de I'argent a un homme qu'ils ne connaissaient ni d'Eve ni d'Adarn ? 11. Qu'ils s'arrangent ! c'est leur affaire ! 152 EXERCISES. 122. 1. Make use of this towel to dry your face. 2. I have made up my mind to return home, and make up for my fault by obeying my father in future. 3. They make it their duty to listen to him always. 4. I cannot make out what she means. 5. Guess what I have in my hand. 6. If you will not make use of this opportunity, the fault will be all your own. 7. If you will make room for me beside you, I will explain to you what I mean. 8. I am told you have again done a crazy thing. 9. You must buy her a watch to make up for the one you lost. 10. If she makes too much of him, she will spoil him. 11. I made her happy by saying that you were well. 12. We shall make up our minds after having seen the goods. 13. My child, you must try to make the best of the education I have given you. 14. We shall manage so that he vdll know nothing of it. 15. As soon as he saw you, he made off. 16. He has made it up with his brother after a long separation. 17. What a fuss he is making ! 18. They would not make way for that carriage. 19. All men are likely to make mistakes. 20. This man is very ill ; if he should be taken away, his family would be ruined. 21. He has virtues and learn- ing, but he is deficient in politeness. 22. Your pretty little manners will not fail to strike them. 23. He lacked money because work failed. 24. Three of my best books are missing. 25. I missed my footing and fell my whole length on the sidewalk. 123. (Section 32.) 1. J^ai bien envie de partir avec lui, mais, si je le propose, je suis presque certain d^essuyer un refus. EXERCISES. 153 2. An milieu cle ce grand monde on yous allez vivre, faites bien attention a votre conduite^ car tout le monde aura les yeux sur vous. 3. Prenez garde de rien dire qui nuise a vos amis. 4. Est-ce bien la ce que vous avez voulu dire? 5. Je n'ai fait que dire un mot, et elle s'est mise a fondre en larmes. 6. Que ne lui dites- vous votre facon de penser? vous verrez qu'il vous en saura gre. 7. Nous nous etions dispute tres-vivement la veille, et le lendemain il est venu me serrer la main comme si de rien n'etait. 8. Cela n^etonne que vous ; vous mesurez tout le monde a votre aune. 9. Je parti- rais bien volontiers avec vous, si j 'avals Fesprit tran- quille sur cette petite somme que je dois payer demain. 10. Qu'a cela ne tienne, j'aurai beaucoup de plaisir a vous avancer ce qu'il vous faudra pour faire face a vos engage- ments. 11. Qu'a-t-elle done pour etre si gale ? 124. 1. If he v/ere polite, lie would not have taken French leave. 2. What^^ ails you? 3. What is the matter in question? It is no business of yours, upon the whole. 4. As matters stand, I advise you as a friend not to meddle with it. 5. Mind you don't fall in going downstairs. 6. He changed his mind on that subject. 7. What do you mea^i? I mean that you are wrong and that you do not know your own mind. 8. Pay no attention to his demand. 9. At any rate, speak your mind freely, but not before them ; they are deceitful. 10. Have you a mind to go for a walk ? 11. It is all one to me. 12. I do not know what was the matter with him. 13. He had a great mind to call for them, and ask what they meant. 14. I merely took it into my 154 EXERCISES. hand to look at it ; it is not worth talking about. 15. Is that what you meant ? 16. I have a mind to go to hear that sermon. 17. I met her in the street as I was com- ing here. 18. You make my mouth water. 19. This gentleman means better than you think. 20. You will bear in mind to tell him that we reckon upon him for that affair. 21. Elizabeth bore malice toward Mary for twenty years. 22. Within the memory of man there never was such a strike. 23. You can never dispossess me of the idea that she was deeply involved in that miserable affair. 24. He is as mad as a March hare; in the middle of the winter he goes about bareheaded. 25. He was chopping wood with all his might. 125. (Section 33.) 1. Auriez-vous la bonte de me dire le quantieme du mois ? 2. Si nous sommes au 13^ c'est apres-demain que je vais toucher nion mois. 3. Oui, mais nous recevons un a-compte tons les mois. 4. II a pris cela pour de 1' argent comptant. 5. Tachez de tirer parti de Peducation que vous avez rcQue. 6. Si vous vous deiiez toujours de vos forces, vous n'arriverez jamais a rien. 7. Je pense bien qu^il voudra de Targent comptant, il ne pent pas faire credit. 8. Est-ce que vous prenez pour argent comptant toutes les nouvelles qu'il fait courir ? 9. II fallait voir ces deux femmes se disputer, c'etait impayable. 10. Ses prom esses ne me touchent pas plus que ses menaces : autant en emporte le vent. 11. Je crois que monsieur aime a rire, et qu'il veut, com me on dit vulgairement, nous faire voir des etoiles en plein midi. 12. C'est de rigueur, et il n'y a la aiicun mystere. EXERCISES. 155 126. 1. Formerly you paid everything ready money, but now you are always short of money. 2. It is too much to think that I shall do all your work. 3. Don't be afraid; they will not mistake you for him, and if you hope to deceive them, you are mistaken. 4. It is rather too much to say that I interfere in your affairs. 5. I have just changed my mind ; it is too muddy to go out. 6. I have a mind to pay every one ready money. 7. Have you received the money which you expected? 8. Guess how much he was mistaken in his calcula- tion. 9. He never mistrusts what he says, nor does he think that you have made a mistake. 10. It grieved me to see that poor old man mourning for the death of his son. 11. During the whole ceremony I did nothing but dream about the news I had just received. 12. Can you tell me what day of the month it is ? 13. Do not mistake rudeness for frankness. 14. Ought he not to make the most of his talents ? 15. We should get it for much less. 16. Is it not too muddy to go there on foot ? 17. Put aside the question of money ; no more of it. 18. You say that you mistrust me, but I will pay you ready money. 19. Yes, by all means. 20. We will move into that old house next September. 21. The industry of man keeps pace with his wants. 22. La Fontaine has very truly said, ^^The reason of the strongest is always the best.'' 23. This child hardly stirs, while her sister is always on the move. 24. Do, please, tell me all about that affair, in your leisure moments. 25. He changes his residence too often ; a rolling stone gathers no moss. 26. People mistake me for my sister, yet she is fair, while I am dark. 156 EXERCISES. 127. (Section 34.) 1. J'ai beau lui refuser de I'argent cliaqiie fois que je lui ecris; il ne laisse pas de m^en demander tous les deux ou trois mois. 2. Ce n'est pas sans peine, j'en suis stir/ qu'il se Yoit force d' avoir recours a vous. 3. II n'a pas meme le necessaire. 4. A d'autres ! ce n'est pas a moi qu'il en fera accroire. 5. Est-ce que ce n'est pas une folic d'en agir ainsi avec celui qui le no'urrit ? 6. II est plus bete que mediant; quoiqu'il se soit mal comporte a votre egard, ne laissez pas de lui envoyer quel que argent. 7. II ne tient a rien que je ne lui en envoie moi-meme. 8. Qu'est-ce que cela vous fait, dix ou douze livres de plus ou de moins ? vous etes un vrai Cresus. 9. Ce n'est pas a moi qu'il faut vous en prendre si votre cousine bat la campagne. 10. A la bonne heure an moins ! voila une bonne lettre, cela coule de source. 11. Je vols tres souvent votre ami Henri, puisque nous demeurons porte a porte. 12. Tous les matins il sort a huit heures, tire a quatre e|)ingles. 128. 1. I nearly fell. 2. If you have the necessaries of life, do not complain, for you do not absolutely need the luxuries, and one may do without them. 3. She is not nearly so pretty as her sister. 4. Do you need ready money ? 5. I wish you all good night. 6. Would it not be nonsense to take offence at his speech ? 7. Non- sense ! he was endeavoring to enliven you by his gayety. 8. It was nothing to him; why should he have inter- fered with the business ? 9. I was nearly dying of cold EXERCISES. 167 and hunger. 10. Was she not under the necessity of writing to you about it ? 11. We sat up all night playing at whist, and went to bed at half-past five. 12. Although he does not like me, he nevertheless comes now and then to see me. 13. Don't vex yourself for such a trifling loss ; it is a mere nothing. 14. You do nothing but play and gossip in that corner. 15. Come to me in case of need. 16. Do you not know me ? We are next door neighbors. 17. You hit the nail on the head, when you said that she led him by the nose. 18. The front doors and windows were all nailed up. 19. He may be good-natured, but he's narrow- minded. 20. I like all fruit raw, that is, as it grows. 21. Without seeming to, he noted down every word that was spoken. 22. Notice that the whole discussion amounted to nothing. 23. He is a nice child, not nearly so mischievous as you say. 24. You came in the nick of time, for I have just come in from a nice walk. 25. There was such a hubbub in the street all night long, that I did not sleep a wink. 129. (Section 35.) 1. Vous n'avez que faire de vous plaindre; cela ne vous avancera guere. ^ 2. Xe prenez pas ce que je vous dis la en mauvaise part. 3. II ne demandait pas mieux que de venir avec nous, mais nous ne nous souciions guere de sa compagnie. 4. Quel homme singulier que M. votre cousin ! 5. Le voila qui se fait vieux mainte- nant. 6. J'espere que vous ne compter ez pas cela pour une visite ; vous n'avez fait qu'entrer et sortir. 7. Elle se plaint a tout bout de champ de la ^Dluie, du froid et 158 EXERCISES. de la chaleur, comme si c'etait de ma faute. 8. J'ai beau lui faire observer que tout le monde en souffre comme elle; elle se croit persecutee et s'obstine a se regarder comme la plus malheureuse des femmes. 9. Je crois, mon cher ami, qu'on vous a monte la tete ; autre- ment vous n'attacheriez pas tant d'importance a ces bagatelles. 10. Soyez des notres ; le plus fort de I'affaire est fait ; nous reussirons d'emblee. 11. Est-ce que son air egare ne vous frappe pas? cela saute aux yeux de tout le monde. 12. Encore un coup je le repete, il ne tient qu'a lui de reussir ; il ne Taura jamais plus belle. 130. 1. It occurs to me that you have missed the best opportunity. 2. I shall have occasion to call for them in the afternoon. 3. I lent them an odd volume of Walter Scott ; I hope they will not take offence if I ask it back. 4. It is all over with us ; we are losing right and left, yet, in my opinion, we have no occasion to fear them. 5. Go away, you only annoy me. 6. We have no objection to joining you there. 7. You have the odds against you, but, if you triumph, what a glory for you ! 8. Will you give me the pleasure of dining with me on Friday week ? 9. I need a pair of boots ; will you oblige me by lending me money to buy them? 10. If you require me, send for me. 11. He was an odd sort of a man, a man of ten thousand ; he deprived himself of the necessaries of life, to give all his income to the poor. 12. Do not give him occasion to laugh at you. 13. They had no occasion to go out without my permission. 14. It seems to me that somebody has over-excited you. 15. He was merelj^ speaking to her. EXERCISES. 159 16. It was all over with. them. 17. Did you see two odd gloves on the table ? 18. Speak to her openly, you must know that she had only your happiness at heart. 19. Take courage, the most difficult part is over. 20. We are not obliged to grant your request. 21. Say on, that is no reason for being afraid to speak ; you know that money is no object to me. 22. How often he has opposed your election ! 23. You will never have a better opportunity ; seize it. 24. She will make a great fuss when she finds the fire out and all her papers out of order. 25. Why don't you pay her back in her own coin ? 131. (Section 36.) 1. II n'y a pas moyen de plaisanter avec lui, il prend tout en mauvaise part. 2. Ce pauvre enfant etait en haillons ; il avait la tete et les pieds nus ; j'en avals vraiment pitie. 3. A la guerre comme a la guerre : en voyage il n^ f aut pas regarder de si pres. 4. II n'a pas eu Phonnetete de me faire part de son mariage. 5. II ne tient qu'a vous de m'en debarrasser pour tou jours ; dites un mot, et tout est fait. 6. C'est bien dommage que vous n'ayez pas affranchi votre lettre. 7. II y regarde de si pres qu'il vous en voudra longtemps. 8. Ce n'est que quand il m'a fait toucher la chose au doigt et a Poeil que je me suis rendu. 9. II semble que vous ayez pris a tache de Firriter : vous voici maintenant dans de beaux draps. 10. Vous aurez beau dire et beau faire, c'est a vous que Ton fera payer les pots casses. 11. Je la trouve passable ; il y a a prendre et a laisser. 12. Cette dame a les bras longs ; c'est a elle, non a moi, qu'il f aut vous adresser. 160 EXERCISES. 132. 1. Pack np immediately ; the train will ''^ soon leave, 2. Will slie take a part in the concert to-night ? 3. I am going to pay a visit to my aunt. 4. Take pity on her. 5. It is a pity that you are in such a hurry. 6. Be so good as to invite her also. 7. If you are not going to any party to-morrow, come and play a hand at whist with us. 8. We are a small party of friends, vvdll you not come with us ? 9. Beware of spoiling his books^ he is particular about them. 10. They would have taken a part in it, if they had been invited. 11. There will be no possibility of packing up our luggage in time. 12. Will they be so polite as to call for us? 13. It would be a pity not to see such a famous man. 14. It is your turn to play. 15. It was not my place to speak first. 16. It will be in his power to come soon. 17. He knows his rights, and is particular about them. 18. Was there no possibility of going to meet them ? 19. Was it not their place to yield to the orders of their superiors ? 20. Be sure to come ; we shall be only a small party of friends. 21. You have got your- self in a fine scrape, by refusing once more to yield to persuasion. 22. Having had full power to draw money, you ought to have paid your bills when due. 23. Believe it or not, as you please, but it is the plain truth. 24. They keep a coach and pair, and yet they are said to be as poor as church mice. 133. (Section 37 ) 1. Ce n'est pas la peine de vous caclier, je vous ai bien vu ; ne f aites done pas Penf ant. 2. Vous voici en fort EXERCISES. 161 belle passe ; vous allez vous reiiclre a Paris, et il ne tiendra qn'a vous cle faire fortune. 3. II fait le bon apotre, mais ne vous y fiez pas. 4. Si vous le mettez an fait du petit tour que nous lui preparons, nous ne nous amuserons plus guere. 5. Que d'affronts il lui faut essuyer pour se conserver en place ! 6. Commencez par mettre votre vanite de cote, et vous verrez que cela ne coutera pas si cher que vous le dites. 7. Veuillez sonner, je vous x^rie. 8. Je crois que vous faites la petite bouche. 9. Aucun des faits qu'elle avait mis en donte ne s'est trouve vrai, apres examen. 10. C'est un livre apres lequel j'ai longtemps soupire ; je Facheterai conte que coute. 11. Quand je lui demande le paiement de mon petit compte, il me renvoie aux calendes grecques. 134. 1. Do not ask so many questions ; you annoy us. 2. He could not put up with her airs ; she pretended to be sick, and he pretended not to observe it. 3. You may ]3ut off your engagement, if you think proper. 4. If that report prove true, we are ruined. 5. Put him in mind of his promise to pay you. 6. To what purpose? he will never do it. 7. Do not pretend to be surprised at seeing them. 8. We should like to know what he will do with all the monejr he puts by. 9. That is nothing to the purpose. 10. You pretend to be rich, and you are not so. 11. The judge postponed his decision. 12. They will, as usual, put the cart before the horse. 13. I fear that story may prove too true. 14. You may tell him so, but it will be nothing to the purpose. 15. You must not question what he says. 16. I asked if they would put aside a few books for us. 17, They 162 EXERCISES. said yes, if I would put them in mind of it. 18. We will put lier up to your little tricks. 19. If you are willing to put up with his extravagance, it is all one to me. 20. Can^t you prevail on him to prevent that mar- riage. 21. Put on your hat ; it is too cold to stand bare- headed by the open window. 22. We have a good many apples left yet- do not buy any w^hile they are so extrav- agantly dear. 23. Speak a few words to her concern- ing that affair; she is far from understanding it. 24. He is still in the prime of life and proof against fatigue. 25. They did not fail to take advantage of the auction, to buy a good deal of furniture cheap 135. (Section 38.) 1. Par cette pluie je serais perce jusqu'aux os avant d'etre a moitie chemin. 2. Ne vous en remettez pas a un autre du soin de votre honneur: nul n'y est plus interesse que vous. 3. Votre observation n'a aucune espece de rapport avec ce qu'elle vient de dire. 4. Je me mettrais en route, lors meme qu'il pleuvrait des hallebardes. 5. Au train dont vous y allez, mon bon ami, vous n'en finirez jamais. 6. Eaison de plus pour que vous me donniez un coup de main. 7. Si vous avez jamais compte sur lui pour vous rendre le plus leger service, vous pouvez rayer cela de vos tablettes. 8. Aidez- moi done un pen, le titre de cet ouvrage ne me revient pas. 9. Comment ! vous voulez que je lui ecrive de but en blanc une lettre si impertinente ! vous allez un .pen vite en besogne. 10. Nous ecrirons cette lettre a tete reposee et nous attendrons jusqu'a demain ; la nuit porte EXERCISES. 1(33 conseil. 11. Ce petit gamin se fait toujours tirer Poreille quand on lui commande quelque chose. 136. 1. I like rain better than sleet. 2. He lent his money at the rate of four per cent. 3. You will never reach that position. 4. Hear reason for once, I beg you, or we shall refer it to an arbitrator. 5. Do they not reflect credit on their teachers ? 6. He is rejoiced at their success. 7. That story relates to what you told us this morning. 8. They rejoice at coming back to Scotland. 9. I think it is going to rain fast, but no matter; you will soon reach home. 10. If you are quick, you will see the queen pass. 11. They would rather lose their money than follow his counsel. 12. What cause have you to be dissatisfied with her ? 13. I have reason to be pleased with them. 14. We reached the steamer in a pouring rain. 15. Will not those children be quiet ? 16. If you refer it to me, I will give you a flat refusal. 17. Would you not rather have a situation in Paris than in London? 18. He was walking rapidly, not like a man just recovering from sickness. 19. I have every reason to believe that he consented very reluctantly. 20. jSTone of us were resigned to that misadventure. 21. When I am embarrassed, my voice fails me; I can- not help it. 22. We are far from being pleased at the turn of affairs. 23. It is interesting to see in what a masterly way he manages the whole court. 24. To the best of my recollection, it happened in the reign of William the Fourth. 25. Hasten home; we are going to have a terrible storm, and we shall be drenched through before we get half-way there. 164 EXERCISES. 137. (Section 39.) 1. II est alle, comme un fou, donner de la tete centre son oncle qui entrait. 2. IST'est-ce pas de vous qu^il s'agit? 3. II ne faut pas toujours se fier a I'enseigne. 4. Parfois on est trahi par ceux sur lesquels on comptait le plus. 5. II s'agit maintenant de savoir qui de vous a tort ; je parie bien que c'est Victor. 6. A quoi voulez- vous que je me decide? je ne sais vraiment de quel bois faire fleche. 7. 'Ne vous mettez pas en peine de votre frere ; il va son petit bonhomme de chemin. 8. Si vous ne vous reposez une heure ou deux apres le diner vous ne ferez rien qui vaille. 9. Vous avez tout le temps de faire un tour dans le jardin, la bonne est en train de faire votre chambre. 10. Les oreilles me tintent, on doit parler de moi quelque part. 11. Je me suis mis sur le pied de ne plus faire de visites. 138. 1. We will repair to-morrow to our lawyer's to inquire as to the best way to get rid of Mm. 2. Do not reproach him with laziness, he has done his utmost. - 3. The question is, to know if they have a right to share in our profits. 4. How did you run your head against that wall ? 5. I will not rely upon your assistance in future. 6. We shall remember your services, and also remind the government of them. 7. It was reported that the Exchange had taken fire last night. 8. I resolved to stay here, but he resolved to repair to Naples. 9. You repeat continually the same thing. 10. One does not know on whom to rely. 11. We shall not roast those pheasants till he comes. 12. Glance over this book, EXERCISES. 165 and tell me what you think of it. 13. He sold the goods at retail to get rid of them more quickly. 14. Remember me kindly to your grandmamma. 15. I have no relish for that sort of novels; they tire me. 16. The duke repaired to the plain, in order to review his troops. 17. You must not be under restraint with me. 18. A report was then spread, if I remember rightly, that the king had resolved to dismiss his ministers. 19. They were just rising from dinner when I entered the room. 20. Eemove the cloth as soon as we leave the dinner table. 21. What decision did they come to concerning your sister ? 22. Eemember that all of us deserve more pity than contempt. 23. I brought all his books, good and bad together, 24. When he once went so far as to sit at the whist table, it was hard to make him leave it. 25. It would not have taken half of that to make her happy. 139. (Section 40.) 1. C'est hier seulement qu'on me Pa fait dire, je ne pouvais gu^re venir plus tot. 2. Elle s'est contentee de me serrer la main et de me jeter un regard d' adieu. 3. II etait tard quand ils ont mis a la voile. 4. On n'y voit goutte pour lire son journal; garcon, allumez le gaz. 5. Envoyez-le done promener ; est-ce que vous allez sacrifier vos interets aux siens ? 6. Je ne savais pas qu'il eut la conscience si large : ni vous non plus, je parie? 7. Sortez sans faire semblant de rien, et allez faire un bout de toilette; vous n'etes vraiment pas pre- sentable. 8. Avant d'aller plus loin, voyons ou en sont les affaires. 9. Je crois etre sur la voie ; j'irai jusqu'au bout : je veux en avoir le coeur net. 10. Le pauvre 166 EXERCISES. garcon s'est mis en quatre pour vous faire plaisir, et voici que yous le recompensez par une longue kyrielle de reproches; ce ii'est pas bien. 11. Elle venait tous les soirs faire sa partie de whist, et tous les soirs j'allais la reconduire chez elle. 140. 1. The fleet set sail on the 20th of July to demand satisfaction from the Chinese. 2. The admiral sent word to the commissioners that he should take satisfac- tion for the injuries done to our merchants. 3. They were forced to remain satisfied with that reply, but they were not convinced of the truth of that reason. 4.' I can scarcely walk. 5. Send for the surgeon and let him see your foot. 6. Send word that I am here. 7. Beware of that grocery he will not scruple to cheat you. 8. You will scarcely get out of that scrape with- out suffering great losses. 9. I was happy to hear that you had arrived safely. 10. Come with us, we shall have a sail till dinner time. 11. Sailors like to live by the sea-side. 12. You will see nothing at all there. 13. If she had more experience, she would be second to none. 14. That telescope will show us the spots on the sun. 15. He will not be satisfied with such a small salary, and he will be quite right. 16. Go on, you are upon the scent. 17. Sit down at the piano and give us a sample of your skill. 18. Some one cried ^^Eire!" and you ought to have seen the stampede. 19. What a scrawl! seriously, I cannot decipher it. 20. I have studied this paragraph a good deal, but I cannot under- stand it. 21. That remark of his put me on the wrong track. 22. That conundrum is too much for me ; I give it up. 23. When I saw you laugh in your sleeve, I II EXERCISES. 167 knew I had made a blunder. 24. The road is very sandy; you must walk the horse. 25. You must not take everything we say in such a literal way. 141. (Section 41.) 1. II fait I'entendu, et il ne sait ni A ni B. 2. Quand il lui faudra se mettre au travail a six heures^ elle trou- vera la chose un pen dure. 3. Gardez, je vous prie^ le silence sur ce detail ; elle ne voudrait plus partir. 4. lis ne reussiront jamais; voila deja deux fois que je les remets sur pied. 5. Veuillez faire silence dans ce coin vous etes toujours a bavarder. 6. Ceux qui disent ce qu'il faut taire, taisent ordinairement ce qu'il faut dire. 7. Vous ne savez pas vous en servir, vous ne vous y prenez pas Men, ce n'est pas comme Qa. 8. Si vous gardez le silence la-dessus, je vous en saurai gre toute ma vie. 9. Vous n'avez qu'a lui rappeler les services que vous lui avez rendus ; c'est le prendre par son endroit sensible. 10. Qui n'entend qu'une cloche n'entend qu'un son. 11. II ne sait plus depuis quelque temps, ni ou se caser, ni a quel saint se vouer. 142. 1. That sofa will serve as a bed. 2. Don't be afraid ; she Avill not dare to show her face. 3. I hope you will be silent respecting his mistake. 4. You set yourself up for a learned person, but you are not. 5. They set up again the statue thrown down by the lightning. 6. We shall be sheltered here from the rain. 7. They refused to do him (a) service. 8. Are you not afraid of 168 EXERCISES. being sea-sick ? 9. ISTot at all, I am a very good sailor. 10. Two days after sailing from Greenock, they were shipwrecked on the coast of Ireland. 11. We were silent, not knowing what to say. 12. If they ask you to sit down, don't do it. 13. I shall ask them to sit down till I am ready. 14. Are you really siding against us? 15. That parasol serves also as an umbrella. 16. If he does not set about his lesson right off, it will soon be too late. 17. If you were in my shoes, you would not say that. 18. You don't know the way to set about it. 19. He never takes the right side, when it is possible to take the wrong. 20. If they should happen to know it, they would not be pleased. 21. My cold in my head makes me feverish; I am shivering with cold. 22. Go and shake hands with her, to set her at ease. 23. Thank you, I have never been fond of walking in other people's shoes. 24. I am sick and tired of being shut in the house ; it has rained hard for a whole week now. 25. Do you sing at sight ? 26. To- morrow I will go shopping, and I will make a great show of my skill. 143. (Section 42.) 1. Cette horloge retarde d'une demi-heure, depechons- nous de partir. 2. Ah qa! qui de nous va porter la parole ? 3. Mais il m'a avoue qu'il avait quelquefois la tete pres du bonnet: c'est toujours cela. 4. Si elle vent arriver avant qu'il tombe de la neige, elle n'a pas de temps a perdre. 5. II n'a pas d'ordre, c'est un panier perce; il depense tout ce qu'il gagne. 6. J'ai connu une vieille dame qui avait passe sa jeunesse aux Indes- Orientales, et qui croyait qu'elles faisaient partie d'une EXERCISES. 169 autre planete. 7. Figurez-vous qu'elle m'avait promis de venir faire ma robe aujourd'hui et qu'elle m'a fait faux bond. 8. II fallait au contraire lui remonter le courage, il est si facilement abattu. 9. J'avais une dent contre lui. 10. Tirez le rideau la-dessus; je n'aime pas a entendre parler de querelles entre mes amis. 11. No vous inquietez pas, vous arriverez tant bien que mal; vous avez encore de la marge. 144. 1. See bow thin that poor animal is ; he is nothing but skin and bone. 2. To s^Deak plainly, you have no right to spend money. 3. You spend your time some- how or other, but quite uselessly. 4. If she falls into that snare, and spends her money extravagantly, her mother will be sorry for it. 5. Has he fallen into the snare laid for him? 6. They will not sit down to table before six o'clock. 7. Will you not be too sleepy to write that letter before going to bed ? 8. His watch is never too slow, and yet, somehow or other, he is alwa3^s late. 9. It is so cold that I rather think it will snow. 10. I should be very sorry for it, as I mean to go to the country. 11. Sit closer, to make room for your new friend. 12. He always speaks for the rest. 13. I put your letter in the post in time for to-night's mail, so you may sleep soundly. 14. You said I was only pretending to be sleepy, but I slept like a top the whole night. 15. He is far too stingy to sit for his picture, he is such a skinflint. 16. She la.ughed in her sleevC; I know, when I made that slip. 17. He's a queer sort of a man; most of the time he's out of a situation. 18. When he's all smiles and graces, beware, there is surely a snake in the 170 EXERCISES. grass. 19. Open all the windows ; the room is close. 20. Spare me from hearing her remarks ; I am acquainted with her style. 21. Sleep over it, to-morrow we will discuss it again. 22. You bought that cheap; that is what I call an excellent bargain. 23. Set the table for ten people ; I will help you a little. 24. Whether you do it or not, it all comes to the same thing. 25. She was not taken unawares the least bit in the world. 145. (Section 43.) 1. II y a un defaut dans ce tableau, Qa saute aux yeux. 2. Ne badinez jamais avec Thonneur des autres. 3. Tenez- Yous-en la au moins, et ne changez pas d^idee a toute heure du jour; vous etes une yraie girouette. 4. Mon cher ami, voila quinze jours que nous ne yous avons yu, Yous dcYcnez rare comme les beaux jours. 5. II s'est eYcille en sursaut et criant a tue-tete : " Au secours ! au meurtre ! on m'assassine ! ^' 6. II faut en linir avec toutes ces querelles. 7. N'est-ce pas Yingt kilometres qu'il a fait ce matin tout d'une haleine ? 8. II ne fait que badiner; il n'est pas homme a yous tenir tete. 9. Je me soucie de Yotre mauYaise humeur comme de Pan quarante. 10. Quand yous yous y mettez, yous n'y allez pas de main morte. 11. II ne faut pas aller par quatre chemins, dites-lui franchement Yotre facon de penser. 146. 1. Two friends of old standing do not stand on such ceremonies. 2. In his eyes, a laugh stands for an argu- ment. 3. The resemblance between you and your sister EXERCISES. 171 is very striking. 4. Make her come upstairs secretly. 5. He stood by thein till the last hour. 6. Would you make a stranger of him who rendered you so many services ? 7. How can I cope with Mr. M ? he is much stronger than I, and he will leave no stone un- turned to succeed. 8. It is more than a month since we have seen him; he is becoming a great stranger. 9. I wish he would hold to his first engagements. 10. Eespect my old friend ; after me, he will be a father to you. 11. Ask the lady upstairs. 12. Is not your reputation at stake in this affair ? 13. The authorities came immediately to the spot. 14. He bantered me about my opinions, but I stood out against him. 15. I am afraid you forgot to put a stamp on your letter. 16. Although I was born in a southern climate, I cannot stand heat. 17. You should stand by what you said. 18. If you feel like it, will you walk three miles with me ? 19. They told old women's stories the whole evening. 20. He started out of his sleep at their arrival. 21. Do you intend to make a long stay in Scotland ? 22. Are you expecting a registered letter ? 23. I cannot stand this any longer, I must go and see for myself how she is. 24. The robbers went upstairs by the private staircase, that is evident. < 147. (Section 44.) 1. Si je ne m'y prends pas autrement, je n'en viendrai jamais a bout. 2. L'accident est arrive comme elle se mettait a table. 3. Xe manquez pas de me rappeler a son bon souvenir, dites-lui que je ne fais que penser a elle. 4. Je parie qu'il prendra tout cela pour de Pargent 172 EXERCISES. comptant. 5. On appelle science du monde le grand art de reussir et de plaire. 6. Ces manieres d'agir ne me conviennent pas le moins du monde. 7. Que de mauvais sang vous m'avez fait faire quand nous etions a la campagne! quelle mauvaise tete vous aviez! 8. II a jure ses grands dieux que ce qu'il venait de dire etait la pure verite. 9. Monsieur, vous le prenez bien haut ; a qui croyez-vous avoir affaire ? 10. Nous allons faire un petit voyage au bord de la mer: cela vous va-t-il? etes-vous des notres ? 11. Cela me va, j'en suis. 12. II y a dix a parier qu'il vous donnera cinq ou six ans de moins que vous n^avez. 148. 1. Do not take it ill, if I scold you when you talk nonsense. 2. George the Fourth succeeded his father. 3. If you are required to write all these letters, you have a heavy task before you. 4. She said she would be sure to come to see me in London. 6. If you succeed in convincing him, be sure to let me know. 6. I will be sure not to say one word about it to her. 7. Sit down to table immediately, and don't wait for him. 8. To be sure, we shall see you with much pleasure. 9. That trial will be the talk 'of the whole country. 10. She takes an airing every morning before breakfast ; she likes getting lip early. 11. Good-by, we will' talk it over again some day. 12. He will take her with him to Italy ; I am quite sure of it. 13. Don't trouble yourself about that ; I'll take it upon myself. 14. Sure enough, I turned the tables on her by taking literally what she had just said. 15. Take this letter to the post-office, after which you will take Amy to school. 16. His book did not succeed, while his brother's met with a great EXERCISES. 173 success. 17. If you take the first prize, I will take you to the opera. 18. Suffice it to say that, with them, it was a deliberate system. 19. I would not take him to be more than eighteen, although he's a head taller than his father. 20. Are you very sure that she is trying to supplant you ? 21. The park swarmed with people, all dressed up in their Sunday clothes. 22. The rich earth gave everything in plenty, when the world was in its infancy. 23. California abounds in all sorts of fruits and flowers. 24. Do learn how to take a joke and keep your temper with your brother. 25. She told me, with tears in her eyes, that she knew her father to be the talk of the town. 149. (Section 45.) 1. Pour le coup c'est trop fort, maintenant on ne pent plus dire sa facon de penser. 2. Un de ces jours vous vous en mordrez les doigts. 3. A la longue^ on se fait a tout. 4. Du train dont Qa va, ma bourse sera bientot plus legere. 5. II arrangera I'affaire pour vous ; c'est ce que vous avez de mieux a faire. 6. II n'y a rien de plus insupportable que ce monsieur, il se jette a la tete de tout le monde. 7. Veuillez done passer chez elle ce soir, ne fut-ce qu'un^ moment. 8. Ce n'est pas grace a elle que vous avez rcQu cette lettre ; elle a fait tout son possible pour empecher qu'on ne vous ecrive. 9. Votre plus court parti est d'aller vous-meme a Paris; partez. ce soir. 10. Puisqu'il s'entete, je ne lui laisserai pas cet ouvrage, dusse-je y perdre cent francs ! 11. De fil en aiguille, il en est venu a parler de Pepreuve que vous venez de subir. 174 EXERCISES. 150. 1. He treats me always with great kindness. 2. Tell him to be sure to come in good time, because she is generally late. 3. Distrust those who have a smooth tongue. 4. He declared that it was no such thing. 5. Speak out your thoughts without any reserve, sir, in the proper time and place. 6. Till then, adieu, and tell her that some time or other I shall answer his letter. 7. Do you think it proper to go out alone so late at night ? 8. They said that was just the thing for them. 9. We were so thirsty that we drank glass after glass of lemonade. 10. If you gave him notice in time, he would come to the wedding. 11. You will repent some time or other. 12. I should speak out my thoughts were I in your place. 13. I should think so. 14. A thought strikes me, — why not buy our return tickets at the same time. 15. In less than no time, those children had set my room topsy-turvy. 16. I beg of you to be indulgent, as this is my first attempt. 17. As matters stand, I must speak, even if I should lose my position for it. 18. It's a little too much ; he expects us to translate such a book as that at sight. 19. His joking borders on impudence. 20. The train being late, I reached home too late ; it was all over with her. 21. The best thing I can do, is to send away all those broken chairs. 22. The savages fought our army as well as they could ; they fought to the death. 23. He has no one to thank but himself for his lack of success. 24. In these days of reviews and examinations, time does not hang heavy on my hands. 25. You will regret it in the long run. 26. She told us that long story, in all its details, the last time we met her. EXERCISES. 175 151. (Section 46.) 1. Vous n'etes pas, je Pespere, sans les moyens de repondre a cette attaque que vous avez si longtemps provoquee. 2. Maintenant, Mademoiselle, c'est a vous a parler, ne vous effrayez pas, vous y serez bientot faite. 3. J'ai beau faire tout mon possible ; les expressions m'echappent, mes idees s^embrouillent, et je reste a court. 4. Vous en avez agi fort mal avec moi, avouez-le. Vous vous entendiez a me faire enrager. 6. En toute chose fais ce que tu dois, et, quelle que soit P opinion du vul- gaire, ne t'en inquiete pas. 6. Usez, n'abusez pas, dit le proverbe. 7. II est inconvenant de rire ainsi au nez des gens. 8. Je vous rembourserai Men entendu les sommes que vous allez verser pour moi. 9. Tout a ete fini en moins de rien, 10. II crie misere a tout bout de champ. 152. 1. Do not trouble yourself about him. 2. Would you take the trouble to write that to him ? 3. If there is any unfairness, you will bring yourself into trouble. 4. She wishes to become a governess. 5. I used to be very uneasy about him when he was away. 6. She was quite unprovided with the materials necessary for her work. 7. They understand how to manage him. 8. Will you undertake to let him know what has hap- pened ? 9. She used to be always in trouble about something. 10. If I promise to use you well, will you come ? 11. Tired of the world, Charles V. turned monk. 12. I will turn him out of doors, if he refuses to obey my orders. 13. We shall be very uneasy about that 176 EXERCISES. affair till it is settled. 14. Use this quill pen; it is better than that one. 15. Do you understand how to do that ? 16. If I can get nothing else to do, I will turn soldier. 17. Were I you, I would not trouble my- self about it. 18. It was a sight to make the bravest turn pale. 19. I would not trust her to pack my trunk, if I were you. 20. She was taken unawares and said whatever came uppermost in her mind. 21. My youngest sister and brother both played truant, in turn. 22. He considered the question in another light. 23. He related the whole affair to me, in every particular. 24. They spoke in such ambiguous terms, that, although I tried hard, I could not understand what they meant. 25. He used my bicycle without my knowledge, and now it is not fit to use. 153. (Section 47.) 1. Vous avez beau faire, vous n'en viendrez pas a bout. 2. Est-ce la le cas que vous faites de mes presents? 3. C'est un garqon qui se fait trop valoir. 4. lis sont partis tons les quatre en meme temps et out couru a qui mieux mieux. 5. II avait bean se demander pourquoi elle s'en etait allee, il ne pouvait en deviner la raison. 6. J'ai beau frotter, Qa ne veut pas s'en aller. 7. Des gros mots ils en sont bientot venus aux voies de fait. 8. A quoi bon vous ingenier a vous rendre malheureuse. 9. Quand vous verrez la chose de plus pres, vous serez de mon avis. 10. Je sais parfaitement qu'il ne regarde pas a Targent et qu'il depense tout ce qu'on lui donne. 11. Est-ce que, par hasard, vous voulez jouer au plus fin avec raoi, mon petit ami ? EXERCISES. 177 154. 1. Do you vouch, for the truth of what you say now ? 2. It is in vain for me to ask her; she will not go. 3. I set great value on that ring ; it was a gift from my mother. 4. They walked from Edinburgh, to Glasgow in two days. 5. I will venture to say they did nothing of the kind. 6. Let us wait upon your master as soon as he comes to town. 7. G-o to his office and wait for an answer. 8. That is just what he used to do when he was with me. 9. It is of no use to try to dissuade him,^ he is so obstinate. 10. Was that the fine picture you value so much ? 11. I am always best waited on in my own house. 12. Will you not walk with me half-way ? 13. Take a walk with me ; you will enjoy it, the weather is so fine. 14. He kept me waiting three hours. 15. I always walk to church, I never drive. 16. I can assure you he values your services highly. 17. Wait for the carriage, and we shall all take a drive. 18. Never lay a wager with that man ; he will cheat you. 19. It would be in vain for me to attempt to gain a prize, I am too stupid. 20. Would it be of no use for you to try ? 21. He is utterly ruined b}^ the failure of the bank, is he not ? 22. I should like to know what this old gun can be good for. 23. She is very underhand, and behaved in the most ungrateful manner to those who had helped her. 24 All his promises are mere talk; no heed must be given to what he says. 25. They vied with each other in their studies all through their college course. * Do not use avoir beau in this sentence, as a clause containing avoir beau must always be followed by another, explaining or completing the first. 178 EXERCISES. 155. (Section 48.) 1. II manque trois feuillets a mon livre; comment vais-je me tirer d'affaire ? 2. Cette ombrelle ne vous servira de rien ; dans cinq minutes elle sera en morceaux et vous serez trempe jusqu'aux os. 3. Combien de kilo- metres Yous reste-t-il a f aire ? 4. II ne manque a ce pay sage qu'une coUine et un ruisseau. 5. Moi ? je veux le voir et lai parler. 6. Je viens de faire liuit milles a pied expres pour le voir, mais qui ne risque rien n'a rien. 7. La seule pensee que je pouvais d'un mot detourner ce malheur, me met le desespoir dans Tame. 8. A premiere vue il n'a pas Pair de manquer d'intelli- gence, mais vous verrez qu'il est facile a desorienter. 9. Le pauvre garqon est malade depuis pres de trois ans; il ne tient plus ; il n^a qu'un souffle de vie. 10. Quelle mouche vous pique, ils n'y a pas de milieu vous dis-je, il faudra que vous en passiez par ou je veux. 11. Nous en sommes revenus il y a aujourd'hui liuit jours, et nous y retournerons d'aujourd'hui en huit. 12. En somme, ce voyage m'a passablement plu. 156. 1. That young man is deficient in politeness ; he is a perfect boor. 2. I wonder what he could possibly want with me. 3. You complain incessantly of the heat; you are always warm, even in the coldest weather. 4. Please speak to her yourself, I know your opinion goes a great way with her. 5. It is well for you that your father is wealthy. 6. She had all her own way, and yet she was never pleased. 7. George asked me EXERCISES. 179 what I wanted with such a large sum of money. 8. She is so wasted away that she cannot walk even to church without being tired. 9. Were I to put on my greatcoat, I should be too warm. 10. I need not tell you that you are welcome to all my books. 11. Shall I not be in your way if I come to-night when Henry is there ? 12. Ko ; we shall want you to play at whist. 13. I will explain their position to you ; this large stone is the fort, as it were, and these are the enemy's troops. 14. For want of money, I had to refuse her what she really was in want of. 15. On my Avay back, about half-way, I met Mary, and I was forcibly reminded of the proverb, '^ Smooth waters run deep.'' 16. You ought to know that, in this cold weather, a muslin dress is not the thing to wear. 17. On the whole, she did it the right way ; what ails you that you find fault with it ? 18. Instead of wasting your time, you'd better watch those workmen. 19. We have lost our way ; will you please put us in the right path ? 20. It is not worth while to weep so bitterly for such a trifle. 21. We are glad to see you; draw near the fire and dry yourself, you're wet through. 22. It is as well for you that you did not accept his invitation. 23. I'll tell you what, there is no other way, and we might as well submit cheerfully. 24. The imperturbable coolness with which you answered, staggered me. 2o. It will be of no use to send for him, he will not stir from his house to-day. 157. (Section 49.) 1. Le jeu n'en vaut pas la chandelle. 2. Dieu sait s'il m'en veut ! 3. Je voudrais bien savoir de combien 180 EXERCISES. il est riche, ce faquin-la ! 4. Vous decidez sans examen qu'il a eu tort de tenter cette entreprise; et je crois, moi, qu'il en retirera honneur et profit. 5. Quelque obstinee que vons soyez, Mademoiselle, il fandraj bon gre mal gve, que vous vous rendiez a Tevidence. 6. Vous dites que non, je dis que si. 7. Maintenant que vous avez tout ce que vous reclamiez, en etes-vous plus avancee ? 8. Honnete ou non, il est certain qu'il a de Pesprit jusqu'au bout des doigts. 9. Ah ca mais ! est-ce que vous croyez que je vais travailler pour le roi de Prusse ? 10. Allons, du courage ! il ne faut pas jeter ainsi le manche apres la cognee. 11. Je crois que ce petit bon- • homme n'a plus la tete a lui ; je n'ai pu lui arracher une parole de la journee. 12. II parle le francais a faire pitie ; il devrait etre defendu par la loi d'estropier ainsi une langue vivante. 13. II est pauvre comnie Job, il n'a pas le sou vaillant. 158. 1. There is nothing I should be more willing to do than that. 2. Jane wishes very much to see Eome. 3. I wonder if she will ever have that desire fulfilled. 4. Take care, he is not a man to mince his words. 5. He assured us that we would not be the worse for it, if we complied with his request. 6. That marquis is said to be worth three hundred and sixty -five thousand pounds per annum, and yet he gets out of his carriage on the other side of the bridge, in order to save the toll. 7. Our butler grew worse and worse every day ; he was never sober. 8. If you break your word to me once, I shall never trust you again ; I am not a man to allow myself to be twice deceived. 9. You will find, sir, that I am as good as my word. 10. I wonder why that pretty EXERCISES. 181 girl married that tiresome old man ? 11. Your brother writes a very bad hand; he is wrong not to take lessons. 12. Willing or unwilling^ she was compelled to listen to his sallies of wit. 13. I suppose that 1 shall have to read that book, but I know that I shan't be any the wiser for it. 14. He was at his wits' end when he found out that he had not a cent left. 15. Don't say another word; where there's a will, there's a way. 16. I took him at his word, because it was really a great windfall. 17. If you are ^Nvise you'll wink at that; a woman must have her own way. 18. When you get mad without rhyme or reason, I always wish myself a hundred miles away. 19. Xo wonder she is so witty, she takes after her mother. 20. You are wrong to scorn what the world may say. 21. Yes, indeed, you have brought the wrong book, as usual. 22, They had a bonfire, and for a wonder, it was not worth much. 23. Eemember that '' a soft answer turneth away wrath " ; try it, and you will win her over. 24. Take my word for it, I will not mention it. 25. She was beside herself with joy when she heard that you were to be here at Christmas. 26. We went to the ball, and enjoyed ourselves to our hearts' content. II. IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. The sections are arrang-ed, so far as possible, in alphabetic order. Phrases that are out of place alphabetically will be found at the ends of the sections. * = colloquial. X = antiquated. p. = person. th. = thing. not to knoio A from B, to be able, to be above (doing, etc.), to care about, to trouble one^s self about, to set about (th.), what is it about? what is the matter? to abuse (p.), to rail atf to abuse (th.), to launch out into abuse, to accomplish (th.) with easCy of my own accord, according to your account, or to you, not on any account, < on my account, to account for (a fact), to account for, to give an account, to call (p.) to account for, to give an account of one's conduct, to take into account, short accounts make long friends, *ne savoir ni A ni B. pouYoir ; etre en etat de. etre trop tier pour. se soucier de ; se mettre en peine de. se mettre a. de quoi s'agit-il ? de quoi est-il question ? injurier ; dire des injures a ; *dire des sottises a. abuser de. se repandre en iuA^ectives. avoir bon marche de. de mon propre mouvement. a vous entendre ; selon vous. pas pour rien au monde. par rapport a moi. expliquer. rendre compte de. faire rendre (or demander) compte a {p.) de {th.). rendre compte de sa conduite. tenir compte de ; faire la part de. ' les bons comptes font les bons amis. 183 184 IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. hy all accounts^ to accustom one's self to, to be accustomed to, to apply to, to be firm., to happen (th.), to do one's best, to be wrong, not to yield an inch, au dire de tout le monde. se faire a ; s'accoutumer a. etre fait a. s'adresser a. tenir bon. se passer. faire de son mieux. avoir tort. *ne pas en demordre. to ache, to acTcnoioledge a letter, to acquaint (p.) loith, to get acquainted, to be among acquaintances, to act foolishly , to act like a man, to act, to impersonate, to act contrary to reason, to be taken in the very act, to be in the very act of, to 7nake much ado about nothing, he made no more ado about it, to address (p.), to accost, to take advantage of (th.), to take advantage of (p.), to give one's enemies an advantage, that is another affair, to affect the manners of, to be able to afforxl to, to be afraid of, to get ahead of (p.), to repent, to regret. avoir mal a. accuser a (p.) reception de sa lettre. faire part de {th.), faire savoir {th.) a (p.). faire connaissance. etre en pays de connaissances. faire une folie, une sottise. faire voir qu' (on) a du coeur. jouer le role de ; faire. agir en depit du bon sens, etre pris sur le fait, en flagrant delit. etre en train de. faire beaucoup de bruit pour rien. *il n'en a fait ni une ni deux, adresser la parole a {p.). profiter de. exploiter {p.). donner prise sur soi. . *cela change la these; *c'est une autre paire de manches. trancher de. avoir les moyens de. avoir peur de ; craindre. prendre les devants. se mordre les doigts. to take after, after the French fashion, against one's will. tenir {th.) de. a la fran9aise. a centre coeur, malgr^. IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 185 to he of an age to. to be of age, not to be of age^ to agree loith (p.), to agree to lohatever one pro- poses, to agree loith (in regard to one' health) , to^igree to it, to agree on, to have agreed on (th.), to ail, to aim at (th.), to lie, to sleep, in the open air, to enjoy the cool air, if that is all, it is all one to me, for all you can say and do^^^ blindly, in all confidence, to let alone, to alloio so much a year, to alloio that, to admit that, to allude to (p. or th.), to overlook (th.), to acknoioledge, to mean (th.), to take place, etre en age de, d'age a. etre majeur. etre mineur. etre d 'accord avec. en passer par ou Ton veut. s faire du bien a. en convenir. etre d' accord snr. etre convenu de (th.). avoir. viser a, aspirer a, en vouloir a. concher en plein air, au grand air, a la belle etoile. prendre le frais. s'il ne tient qu'a cela. cela m'est egal. * Yous avez beau dire et beau faire. les yeux fermes. laisser tranquille. faire une pension de. admettre que. faire allusion a. savoir passer, reconnaitre, avouer. vouloir dire, avoir lieu. 4. to alter one^s mind, to be amazed at (th.), to speak ambiguously, < amicably, to amount to the same thing, to amuse one's self very much, to be very much amused, to be angry at or about (th.), to be angry loith (p.), to be an annoyance to, to answer for it, changer d'avis or d'idee. *tomber des nues. parler a mots converts, de gre a gre, a Taimable. revenir au meme. *s'en donner a coeur-joie. etre fache, pique, irrite, de. etre fache contre : en vouloir a ; se mettre en colere contre. tracasser, importuner. en repondre. 186 IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. • he has anticipated his revenue, to be anxious about, to be anxious fo?' (tli.)» to apologize for, it ivould appear, to apply to (p.), to apply one's self to (th.), to apply too late, to approve that, to be too apt to, afar-fetched argument, arm in arm, to make (p.) ashamed, as I see, as it seems, to implore, to remember to (p.), to say or do nothing more, *il a mange son ble en herbe. etre en peine de ; etre inquiet sur or de. avoir (th.) a coeur. faire des excuses de. a ce qu'il par ait ; il y a apparence. s'adresser a, avoir recours a. s'appliquer a. s'y prendre trop tard. trouver bon que {ivith subj.). n'etre que trop porte a. * un argument tire par les cbeveux. bras dessus bras dessous. faire hoiite a {p.) de (th.). a ce que je vois ; a ce qu'il parait. se mettre a genoux devant. rappeler au souvenir de. en rester la. 5. to ask for, to ask after, to ask (p.) to dine, to ask (p.) in, to be fast asleep, to assume consequential airs, to be astounded at, astonished, to be attached to (th.), to value (th.), to attempt impossibilities, to attend (a class), to attend to (th.), 1 10 ill attend to him in a minute, to attend to one's business, to pay, to give, attention, to be all attention to (p.), to be very attentive to (p.), to distract a person's attention. s'informer de. inviter {p.) a diner.- faire eutrer. dormir i)rofondement ; etre dans un profoud sommeil. *faire le gros dos; se rengorger; *trancher de I'important. n'en pas revenir, tomber des nues. tenir a. *vouloir prendre la lune avec les dents, suivre. faire attention a; s'occuper de; {emphatic) tenir la main a. *je suis a lui dans une minute. s'occuper de ses affaires. faire, preter, attention. *en etre aux petits soins avec {p,) . donner des distractions a ; traire. dis- IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 187 to avail nothing, to avail one's self of, it avails nothing, it is of no use, on an average, ' to he aware of, not to he aicai^e of, to take away from, to have a very awkward look, to heUeve one's self the first man in the land^ to he conceited, to eat a great deal, to he pretty well, two remain (subtraction), ne servir a rien, ne servir de rien (de). profiler de. ut a stop to, to keep repeating the same thing, to be . . . nevertheless, vivre de. faire bourse commune. demeurer ici pres. de quoi vivre. gagner homietement sa vie. chercher a gagner sa vie. pour vivre. gagner sa vie. combler de bienfaits. fermer a cle or clef. mettre sous cle or clef. sous clef. tarder a. trouver le temps si long. toute sa vie durant. *toute la saint e journee. a la longue. dans combien de temps. il me tarde de. avoir un grand desir de ; soupirer apres. avoir Tair. avoir meilleure mine, avoir bonne, or mauvaise, mine, avoir I'air de; *prendre la tour- nure de. avoir bien la mine de. avoir I'air distingue, faire la mine. elle a I'air tres comme il faut. eile a pense, or failli, tomber. vous me manquez. perdre. la belle avance.- un brouhaha, mettre la hola. un sempiternel refrain, ne pas laisser d'etre. 30. to look after or to (th.), to look for. avoir soin de. chercher. IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 217 to look for a knot in a bulrush, to look forioard loith pleasure, to look on (said of a room, window, etc.), to look sharp, to look about one, to look 171, to look over, to glance over, look about you, take care of your- self, beivare, one must look before one leaps, to keep a sharp lookout, by his looks you ivould think he loere ill, to lose one^s reputation, to lose sight of, to lose one's temper, to sustain, to suffer, to meet ivith a loss, to be at a loss lohat to say, to give (th.) up for lost, I have lost my money thereby, all is not lost that is delayed, that is not lost lohich comes at last, neither for love nor money, to give one's love to, to send one's love to, to be in love ivith, to be in luck, to be lucky, to be always in luck, to have bad luck, to bring good luck, bad luck, to have a lucky hand, to become bankrupt, in good earliest. chercher midi a quatorze heures. se faire une fete, un plaisir, de. donner sar; avoir vue sur. avoir I'air e'veille ; se depecher. avoir les yeux ouverts; avoir Toeil ouvert. faire une petite visite ; *dire un petit bonjour. Jeter les yeux sur ; parcourir. prenez garde a vous. il y faut regarder a deux fois. *etre sur le qui-vive; avoir I'oeil ouvert. a le voir, vous le croiriez malade. se perdre de reputation, perdre {p. or th.) de vue. perdre son sang-froid ; perdre patience, essuyer, faire, une perte, en etre pour, ne savoir que dire, regarder (th.) comme i^erdu; en faire, or prendre, son deuil. *j'en suis pour mon argent, ce qui est differe n'est pas perdu, il vaut mieux tard que jamais. pas pour tout I'or du monde. faire ses amities a. faire faire ses amities a. etre amoureux de. etre en bonheur, avoir du bon- heur, jouer de bonheur. *etre ne coiffe; etre en veine. avoir du malheur ; jouer de mal- heur ; avoir du guignon. porter bonheur, porter malheur. avoir la main heureuse. faire banqueroute. bel et bien. 218 IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. gently I gently ! loorse than ever, tout beau ! tout doux ! de plus belle. 31. to be mad, a maid of all loork, to make (before an adjectlye), to make much of, to make out (th.), to make it one's duty to, to make it up ivith (p.), to make the best of, to make up for (th.), to make up for (th.) by, to make up one's mind to, to make a fuss, to make room or way for, to m^ake use of, to make one's mouth loater, to make money, I can make nothing of it, to a man, manage as you can, to miss (p.), she missed her footing, not to know at all (p.) , to commit an error, to be deficient, fail, lack, you failed in your duty, to do a crazy thing, etre fou ; avoir perdu la tete. une bonne a tout faire. reudre. faire grand cas de ; faire des caresses, des amities, a. deviner; trouver; comprendre. se faire un devois de. se raccommoder, se reconcilier, avec. tirer parti de ; faire valoir. reparer, remplacer. se rattraper de [th.) sur. prendre le parti de ; se decider, faire de I'embarras. faire place a. se servir de. * faire venir I'eau a la bouche a {p.) . gagner, amasser, de I'argent. je m'y perds, je n'y concois rien, j'y perds mon latin, jusqu'au dernier, arrangez-vous. manquer (impers.). le pied lui a manque, ne connaitre ni d'Eve ni d'Adam. manquer. manquer de. vous avez manque a votre devoir, faire un coup de tete, * faire des siennes. 32. to bear malice, to have good manners, to be polite, ivell bred, to get married, to be master of a language, en vouloir a. savoir vivre ; avoir du savoir vivre. se marier. posseder une langue a fond. IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 219 to he the matte?' (th.), to be the matter (p.), to come to the matter, to the point, to find matter, subject, reason, as if nothing loere the matter, as matters stand, to mean, to mean loell, to mean loell to (p.), lohat does that mean? by all means, he would have it by all means, by no means, what is meant by ? to measure other people^ s corn by one^s oion bushel, to meddle loith or i7i, to interfere, to meet (by chance) , to meet (on purpose, by appoint- ment) , till ive meet again, to meet halfioay, to divide the difference, to meet ivith (an accident) , to meet with a refusal, to come to meet, to meet (expenses, engagements), to make both ends meet, to have a short memory, to the best of my memory, within the memory of man, do not mention it I it is not loorth mentioning, he merely took it in his hand, as merry as a cricket, in the very middle of, to be in the midst of lointer, loith one's might, to mind (th.), y avoir, etre question de. avoir. venir an fait. trouver de quoi. *comme si de rien n'etait. au point oii en sont les choses. vouloir dire. avoir de bonnes intentions ; etre de bonne foi. vouloir le bien de. qu'est-ce a dire ? certainement ; par tons lesmoyens. il le voulait a toute force, en aucune maniere ; nullement. que veut dire ? que signifie ? mesurer les autres a son aune. se meler de. rencontrer. rejoindre ; aller trouver ; voir. aurevoir; jusqu'au revoir. faire chacun la moitie du chemin ; se rencontrer a mi-cbemin ; par- tager le differend. arrive r. essuyer un refus. venir au-devant de. faire face a. *joindre les deux bouts ensemble, avoir la memoire courte. autant qu'il m'en souvienne. de memoire d'homme. *il n'y a pas de quoi ! cela ne vaut pas la peine d'en parler. il n'a fait que le prendre a la main, gai comme un pinson. au beau milieu de. etre au coeur de I'hiver. a tour de bras, s'occuper de, faire attention a, prendre garde {before a verb). 220 IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. to he easy in one^s r)iind, to hear in mind, to have a mind to, to have (th.) in mind, to open one's mind to, to know one's own mind, to change one's mind,, to mind trifles, to tell one's mind (about some- thing unpleasant), to have everything to one's mind, to dioell upon one's mind, to speak one's mind freely, you don't knoiv your own mind, you will never put that out of my mind, if you have a mind, never mind, do not mind him, to he this minute {gone, etc.), it is no concern of youi^s, upon the ivhole, to take French leave, avoir I'esprit tranquille. ne pas oublier. avoir en vie de. avoir {th.) present a I'esprit. s'ouvrir a. savoir ce que Ton yeut. changer d'avis, d'opinion. s'arreter a des bagatelles. dire tout ce que Ton a sur le coeur. avoir tout a souhait. tenir au coeur a. dire franchement sa facon de penser ; dire sa pensee. vous ne savez ce que vous -voulez. *vous ne m'oterez jamais cela de la tete. *si le coeur vous en dit. c'est egal! n'importe! pen im- porte ! qu'a cela ne tienne. ne faites pas attention a lui. ne faire que de (partir, etc.). cela ne vous regarde pas. apres tout, a tout prendre, partir a TAnglaise. 33. to mistake for, to mistake (th.), to he mistaken in, to make a mistake, hy mistake, to mistrust, to douht, to suspect, to mix (th.) xoith (th.) , spare moments, leisure moments, ready money, pocket-money, this is worth any money, to he short ofm^oney, to receive money, to he worth any money, prendre pour. se tromper de, sur or dans. faire une meprise. par megarde. se mefier, se defier, de. meler {th.) avec {th.). moments perdus ; moments de loisir. argent comptant. menus plaisirs. ceci a une grande valeur. etre, se trouver, court d 'argent, recevoir, toucher, de I'argent. Ctre impayable. IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 221 to have money about one^s self, to have money by, to invest money ^ to throw away one's money ^ to turn everything into money, money governs the icorlcl, he would make me believe that the moon is made of green cheese, by moonlight, that is moonshine, it is as light as air, more and more, no more of it, the more the merrier, the more haste, the icorse speed, the next morning, early in the morning, a rolling stone gathers no moss, to make the most of, he mounted upon his high horse, to mourn for (th.), as poor as a church mouse, by 10 or d of mouth, verbally, in everybody' s mouth, to move (to stir) , to move (from one's residence), to be continually on the move, to be too much, too bad, to be too much or too many, for much less, as much again, ^ to be muddy, to muse upon, to dream of, by mutual agreement, there is some mystery in it, that beats all, to believe easily, to keepj pace with. avoir de T argent sur soi. avoir de I'argent en caisse. placer de I'argent. Jeter I'argent par les fenetres. faire argent de tout. I'argent fait tout. *il veut me faire voir des etoiles en i3lein midi. au clair de la lune. *autant en emporte le vent. de plus en plus. n'en parlous i^lus. plus on est de fous, plus on rit. plus on se hate, moius on avance. le lendemain matin. le matin de bonne heure ; de bon matin, de grand matin, pierre qui roule n'amasse pas de mousse, tirer parti de ; faire valoir. il monta sur ses grands chevaux. s'affliger de. gueux, pauvre comme un rat d'eglise. de vive voix. tout le monde en parle. *bouger. demenager. ne pouvoir rester en place, etre trop fort (de) . etre de trop. a beaucoup moins. line fois autant. faire crotte {impers.) y avoir de la bone, rever a. de gre a gre. *il y a quelque anguille sous roche. ceci est impayable. prendre pour argent comptant. croitre en raison de. 222 IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. autant en emporte le vent. lightly spoken, lightly broken; empty words, part payment, to pay cash, ■ payer, donner un a compte. payer argent comptant. 34. to nail up a door, a windoiv, to hit the nail on the head, a narroio mind, a narrow understanding , that is natural, that comes from the heart, in its natural state, from nature, to be good-natured, near, nearly, almost, to be nearly falling , dying, etc., to be not nearly so, he is not nearly so proud as you say, to be as neat as possible, to have the necessaries of life, to be wider the necessity of, to stand in need, to need, in case of need, if need be, ivhat need is there of 9 what need you care f to have a sort of negligence, care- lessness, nonchalance, about one, to be next door neighbors, nevertheless, he nevertheless comes to see me, ivhat is the neivs ? anything new ? no 7iews is good news, ivhat next ? a nice child, condamner une porte, une fenetre. *mettre le doigt dessus ; *y etre. iin esprit etroit. une intelligence bornee. cela coule de source. au naturel. d'apres nature. etre d'un bon naturel. peu s'en faut, il ne tient a rien, que ne (ivith the subjunctive). raanquer de tomber, de mourir, etc. n'etre pas a beaucoup pres aussi. il n'est pas a beaucoup pres si fler que vous le dites. etre tire a quatre epingles. avoir le necessaire. se voir force de. avoir besoin de. au besoin ; s'il le faut. *quel besoin y a-t-il de ? a quoi bon? de quoi vous mettez-vous en peine ? avoir du laisser-aller. demeurer porte a porte. ne laisser pas de. il ne laisse pas de venir me voir. quelles nouvelles y a-t-il? qu'y a-t-il de nouveau ? point de nouvelles, bonnes nou- velles. apres ? ensuite ? quoi encore ? un srentil enfant. IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 223 a nice ivalk, to a nicety, in the nick of time, by night, in the nighty a sleepless night, to ivish a good night, to stay out all night, to pass a sleepless night, to sit up all night, to say no, to talk nonsense, to rave, nonsense, nor I either, to lead by the nose, to note down, to take note of, good for nothing, next to nothing, (he got angry) for nothing, it is a mere nothing, a trifle, as if nothing at all iva the matter, to amount to nothing, to do nothing but, to be nothing to (p.), to be nothing to (th.), to take no notice of, to take notice, to observe, he took no notice of me, m how now 9 vjhat is itf now and then, without seeming to, to be quite dark, he is exceedingly rich, not to sleep a vjink, une promenade agreable. a point ; parfaitement. a point nomme. de nuit, pendant la nuit. une nuit d'insomnie ; une nuit blanche, dire, souhaiter, le bonsoir a. ne pas rentrer de toute la nuit. *passer une nuit blanche. * passer la nuit. dire que non. deraisonner ; dire des sottises ; *dire des betises; *battre la camiDagne. allons done ! ah bah ! *a d'autres ! ni moi non plus. *mener par le bout du nez. prendre note de. bon a rien ; vaurien. presque rien. *a propos de rien; *a propos de bottes. *c'est une misere. *comme si de rien n'etait. n'avancer en rien; ne signifier rien. ne faire que. ne point regarder. ne rien faire a. ne faire aucune attention a ; ne faire semblant de rien. remarquer, observer, il n'a pas fait semblant de me voir, qu'est-ce? qu'y a-t-il? eh bien? que veut dire ceci ? de temj)s en temj)s. sans faire semblant de rien. faire tout a fait nuit {impers.). il est riche comme Cresus, il roule dans I'or. ne pas fermer roeil. 224 IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 35. 7)%oney is no object to me, to have no objection, to oblige, to be obliged to (do), to be obvious, to be evident, as occasion requires, there is no occasion, there is no occasion, no necessity, for it, what occasion is therefor, on every occasion, to have occasion for, to require, to have no occasion for, to give occasion, it occurs to me that, odd or even, an odd kind of a man, an odd volume, at odd times, to have the odds against one^s self, one mile off, be off, get away, to take offence at, hoiv often ? hoio old would you take me to be? to be old enough to, to get, to groiv, old, on the right hand, on the left hand, say on, and so on, for once, once more, to be all one to, to be one of us, if that be the only obstacle, only, merely, je ne regarde pas a I'argent. ne demander pas mieux que de. faire le plaisir a (p.) de {before a verb) . etre tenu a. etre evident ; * sauter aux yeux. suivant {or selon) I'occasioii. *il n'y a pas de quoi. *il n'en est pas besoin ; il n'y a pas besoin. qu'est-il besoin de {or que) . a tout propos ; * a tout bout de champ, avoir besoin de. n'avoir que faire de. donner lieu or sujet de {before a verb). il me vient a I'idee que. pair ou non. un bomme singulier, bizarre, un volume depareille. dans les moments perdus. avoir affaire a forte partie. a un mille d'ici, de la. allez-vous-en. s'offenser, se piquer, se facher. combien de fois ? quel age me donneriez-vous? etre d'age a, o?' en age de. vieillir ; se faire vieux. a main droite, a main gauche, dites tou jours. et ainsi de suite ; et ainsi du reste. une fois dans (votre) vie; une bonne fois. encore une fois ; encore un coup, etre egal a; etre la meme chose pour, etre des notres. s'il ne tient qu'a cela. ne faire que. IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 225 at the first onset, at once, that loindoio does not open, let us speak openly, to speak openly, to do it openly, in my opinion, to he of opinion, to have a fair opportunity, to miss, to let slip, the opportunity , to seize the opportunity, to take time by the forelock, you will never have a fairer opportunity, to oppose (th.), to he out Q).), to he out (fire) , to he out of order, to over-excite (p.), to overrate (th.) , to pay (p.) hack in his own coin^ you must not he so particular , a coach and pair, to point out (th.) to (p.), as poor as a church mouse, poverty is no crime, as much as lies in my power, on or under pretence o/, he is a hoohy. d'emblee. cette feuetre ne s'ouvre pas parlons a coeur ouvert. parler a coeur ouvert. ne point s'en cacher. a mon avis ; selon moi. etre d'avis. avoir beau jeu. manquer, laisser echapper, lais- ser passer, Toccasion. ^prendre I'occasion aux cheveux. * vous ne Faurez jamais plus belle. mettre de rempechement a. etre sorti. etre eteint. etre derange. monter la tete a {p.). attacher trop d'importance a. Prendre la pareille a {p.). il n'y faut pas regarder de si pres. une voiture a deux chevaux. faire observer {th.) a (p.). pauvre comme un rat d'eglise. pauvrete n'est pas vice. autant qu'il est en mon pouvoir ; de tout mon pouvoir. sous pretexte de ; sous couleur de. c'est une cruche. 36. to pack up, to take o.part in, to part with ov from (p.), to part with or from (th.), to give up, the most difficult part is over, to he particular, to he particular in or ahout, to go to a party, Q faire sa malle. prendre part a, or dans. se separer de ; quitter, se defaire de ; ceder. le plus fort est fait. y regarder de pres ; tenir a. etre difiicile sur; etre exigeant pour, aller en soiree, 226 IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. to he a small party offriends^ to pass round, to hand round y to he too patient, to hear one's misfortunes patiently, he wanted to make a cat's paw of me, to pay to the uttermost farthing , to pay a hill when due, to pay attention to, to pay the carriage or postage, to pay no regard to (th.), to pay a visit to, to pay one's respects to, whoever does the damage must pay for it, no performance I at his peril, to yield to persuasion, one may pick and choose, to he in a fine pickle, to get into a scrape or dilemma, to have a finger in the pie, to tear into pieces, I had to swallow that pill, take council of your pillow, or sleep on itj it is a thousand pities, it is a pity, it is a great pity, the more is the pity, so much the worse, to have, to take, pity on; to shoiv pity to, to take place, to happen, in the first place, in the next place, in the last place, it is your place to^ etre en petit comite. faire passer de main en main ; faire passer a la ronde. *se laisser tondre la laine sur le dos. prendre son mal en patience. * il voulait me faire tirer les mar- rons du feu. *payer rubis sur I'ongle. payer un billet a I'echeance. faire attention a. affranchir. n 'avoir aucun egard a. rendre une visite a ; faire visite a. pre'senter ses respects a. , *qui casse les verres les paie. relache ! a ses risques et perils, se rendre a 1' evidence. *il y a a prendre et a laisser. *etre, s'etre mis, dans de beaux draps. * avoir la main a la pate, mettre en pieces; dechirer en morceaux. *il m'a fallu avaler cette pilule {or cette couleuvre) . la nuit porte conseil. c'est grand dommage; c'est bien facbeux. c'est dommage (de). c'est bien dommage (de). tant pis. avoir, prendre, pitie de; avoir compassion de. avoir lieu, arriver, se passer, d'abord ; en premier lieu, pais ; ensuite. enfin ; en dernier lieu, c'est a vous de. IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 227 in plain terms, the plain truth, to make (th.) plain, to play on the piano, to play a game at, as you please, if I please, loill you please sit doivn, to be pleased ivith, to be pleased ivith one's self, to do ivhat one pleases, to have full, free scope, to take, to find, pleasure in, to pledge one's honor, to be so polite as to, there is no possibility of, to take pot-luck, to be in one's poioer (impers.) , to have extensive power, to give full poioers, to practise (music), to speak in praise of, to preclude one's self from, to prejudice a person's mind, to be prejudiced against, she did not fail to, to spend money freely , to send notice, all is over, it is all over ivith him, en termes tres-clairs; *en bon fran9ais. la pure verite ; la f rauche verite. expliquer, eclaircir, faire toucher {th.) au doigt et a I'ceil. jouer du piano, faire une partie de. comme bon vous semble ; comme vous voudrez. si cela me plait, donnez-vous la peine de vous as- seoir. etre content, satisfait, charm e, de. *etre content de sa petite per- sonne. * avoir ses coudees f ranches. prendre plaisir, se plaire, a; trouver du plaisir dans, en donner sa parole d'honneur; jurer sur son honneur. avoir I'honnetete de. 11 n'y a pas moyen de. * diner a la fortune du pot. ne tenir qu'a (p.) de (impers.). * avoir les bras longs. * donner carte blanche, etudier. faire I'eloge de. se priver de. monter la tete a (p.). etre prevenu contre. elle ne se fit pas faute de. ne pas regarder a I'argent. faire part de. tout est fini. e'en est fait de lui. to be presumptuous, to pretend to be, to pretend to, 37. ne douter de rien. faire le, la, les. faire semblant de ; feindre de. 228 IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHEASES. to pretend to great tnatters^ that pretended doctor^ there is a pretty quantity of it, to prevail on (p.) to, to prevent (p. or th.), at any ijrice, the loivest price, to pride one^s self on (th.) , to take pride in, to he in the prime of life, to act up to one's principles, to proceed to (a place) , to proceed icith (a journey, etc.), to form idle projects, to proinise ivonders, to promise mountains of gold, to he proof against, to have, to feel, a propensity towards, if you think proper, properly speaking, a prophet has no honor in his oivn country, in proportion as, in proportion, man proposes and God disposes, to have a very fine prospect, to prove, to hecome, to prove true or to he true, all proved in vain, it is not within my province or sphere, to lay in provisions, without provocation, loantonly, to pull the hell, to he a mere puppet, for the purpose of, on purpose, to no purpose, uselessly, it is nothing to the purpose, to talk to the purpose, faire I'homme d'importance. ce soi-disant medecin. il n'y en a pas mal. engager, decider (p.) a. empecher. a tout prix ; coute que coiite. le plus juste prix. se faire gloire or honneur, se glorifier, de. etre a la fleur de I'age. agir, se conduire, suivant ses principes. se rendre a. reprendre; continuer. faire des projets en I'air. promettre mouts et merveilles. etre a I'epreuve de. avoir du penchant pour. si bon vous semble. a proprement parler. nul n'est prophete en son pays. a mesure que. au fur et a mesure. rhomme propose et Dieu dispose. * etre en fort belle passe. devenir. se trouver vrai, se realiser. tout fut en vain. cela n'est pas de mon ressort. faire ses provisions. de gaiete de coeur. tirer la sonnette, sonner. etre un vrai mannequin. dans le but de. expres. sans effet ; en pure perte. cela ne dit rien ; cela ne fait rien, cela ne signifie rien, parler a propos, IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 229 to he nothing to the purpose, to he to no purpose, to ansiver various purposes, to push 07ie's self forward, to put hy or aside, to lay hy, to put the cart hefore the horse, to put an end to, to put in mind, to put off, to postpone, to put out of joint, to dislocate, to put on one's hat, to put one' s self out for , to put up at (a hotel), to put up (p.) to it, to put up with (to bear, to endure) , to put up icith (to be satisfied with) , to put up with an affront, to he puzzled, to question (p.)? to question (th.), that is without question, as a matter of course, to postpone indefinitely, extravagantly dear, to hefarfro'in, to hroach a suhject. *ne faire rien a I'affaire. n'aboutir a rien. servir a plusieurs usages. se pousser. mettre a part or de cote ; epargner. mettre la charrue devant les boeuf s. mettre fin a ; faire cesser. rappeler (th.) a (p.) ; faire res- souvenir (p.) de. remettre ; ajourner. se demettre. se couvrir. se deranger pour. descendre a. mettre (p.) au fait; *donner le mot a. essuyer; souffrir; supporter. se contenter de ; se soumettre a. *boire un affront. etre bien embarrasse. faire des questions a. douter de ; mettre {th.) en doute. *cela va sans dire. *renYoyer aux calendes grecques. hors de prix. s'en falloir de beaucoup. toucher quelques mots a. 38. to he a question of, to call in question, ^ as quick as lightning, to he quick, to he quick in one's proceedings, to he quiet, to he quits, to rack one's hrain ahout (th.), within a radius of (tico miles), to he all the rage, the storm is raging, s'agir de; etre question de {impers.). mettre, revoquer, en doute. prompt comme I'eclair. se depecher. *aller vite en besogne. rester tranquille. etre quittes. se mettre I'esprit a la torture pour a (deux milles) a la ronde. faire fureur. il fait un temps affreux. 230 IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. to rain fast f to pour, small 7'ain lays great dust, it is raining cats and dogs, to talk at random, to ransack one's brains, to be in raptures, at any rate, cost ichat it may, at the rate of, at the rate he goes on, to walk at a great rate, to have rather, to reach (th.), to reach (a place), within reach, out of reach, he is out of reach, the letter reached me, I have reached it noio, to bring up the rear, to have reason, cause, to have every reason to, to have reason to be satisfied loith, to give reason, room, cause, loith good reason, with still greater reason, another reason why, it stands to reason, there is reason to suppose that . . ., to be reasonable, he will not go, he has his reasons for it, for reasons best knoion to myself, to receive injury (goods) , short reckonings make long friends, I cannot recollect his name at present, to the best of my recollection, to have recourse to, to recover from illness, to recover one's senses, to reduce one' s pretensions, pleuvoir a verse (impers.). petite pluie abat grand vent. *il pleut des hallebardes. parler a tort et a travers. se mettre I'esprit a la torture. *etre aux anges. a tout prix, cotite que coute, a raison de. *au train dont il y va. marcher a grands pas. aimer mieux. atteindre. arriver a. a la portee, hors de la portee. on ne pent pas le rejoiudre ; il est hors d'atteinte. la lettre m'est parvenue. m'y voila arrive, fermer la marche. avoir sujet or lieu de. avoir tout lieu de. avoir a se louer de. donner sujet or lieu de. a bon droit. a plus forte raison. ' raison de plus pour, le simple bon sens le veut ainsi. il y a lieu de croire que . . . entendre raison. *il n'ira pas, et pour cause. pour raisons a moi connues. etre endonimage. les bons comptes font les bons amis, son nom ne me revient pas. autant qu'il m'en souvient. avoir recours a {p. or th.), en venir a (th.). relever de maladie. re venir a soi. * mettre de I'eau dans son vin. IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 231 to refer to (p.), to give (p.) a reference to, in reference to, In or loith regard to, to have respectable references, good recommendations, to reflect credit on, upon reflection, on second thoughts, to do (th.) loith due reflection, to give aflat refusal, to meet with a refusal, to have, to show, regard for, regard being had to, my kind regards to, as regular as clock-ioorTc, in the reign of, to rejoice at, to relate to (th.), to relax one's mind after loorJc, with reluctance, to fail, she cannot help it, it is interesting to see, you ought to see, to be resigned, s'en remettre a; s'en rapporter a. renvoyer {p.) a; fouruir de bons renseiguements. par rapport a. pouvoir donner de bons renseigne- ments ; avoir de bounes recom- mandations. faire bonne ur a. toute reflexion faite. faire {th.) a tete repose'e. refuser net. essuyer un refus. avoir, temoigner, des egards pour. eu egard a. mes amities a ; mille cboses a. *reg] e comme un pa^Dier de musique. sous le regne de. se rejouir de. avoir rapport a, se rapporter a. se distraire. a contre-coeur. manquer. c'est plus fort qu'elle. il faut voir. prendre son parti de. 39. to rely on or upon, rely upon it, to remember, ^ to remember (p.) kindly to (p.), if I remember rightly, give my kind remembrance to him, to the best of my remembrance, to remind (p.) of. se fier a (p.) ; compter sur {p. or th.), comptez-y ! comptez la-dessus ! se souvenir de (p. or th.) ; se rap- peler (th.) ; se remettre (p.)- rappeler Q;.) au bon souvenir de; dire a (p.) bien des choses de la part de (p.). si j'ai bonne memoire. dites-lui mille choses (or bien des choses) de ma part, autant que je puis m'en souvenir, rappeler (th.) a (p.). 232 IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. to remove the cloth, to repair to (a place) , to he quick in one's repartees^ it is reported that, they are mere reports, to reproach (generally), to reproach (p.) for or loith, to reprove (p.) gently, to take a resolution to, it is a firm resolution, to resolve to, with respect to (th.), with respect to (p.), in that respect, it is a want of respect, respecting, in all respects, in some respects, it respects, regards, concerns, among the rest, there is no enjoyment when one is under restraint, to he under restraint, to put a violent restraint upon one's self, let us resume our discourse, let us return to our subject, to retrench from, to return immediately ^ to have returned, to review, as rich as a Jeio, to get rid of, to ride, to take a ride, a drive, to ride, to drive, through {a place) , to give cause for ridicule, to make one's self ridiculous. oter le couvert. se rendre a. avoir la repartie promi)te; etre vif a la riposte, on dit ; le bruit court que. *ce sont des on dit. faire des reproches a (p.). reprocher {th.) a {p.). reprendre {p.) avec bonte. se mettre sur le pied de. c'est un parti pris. se resoudre a ; se determiner a ; se decider a ; prendre le parti de. par rapport a ; quant a. a regard de. a cet egard. c'est un manque d'egards. a regard de. a to us egards. sous quelques rapports, il s'agit de. entre autres. ou il y a de la gene il n'y a pas de plaisir. se gener, se contraindre. se faire violence. re venous a nos moutons. prendre sur. ne faire qu'aller et venir. etre de retour. faire la revue, passer en revue. riche comme un Cresus. se debarrasser, se defaire, de. aller a clieval. faire une promenade a cheval, en voiture. parcourir (un endroit) a clieval, en voiture. prefer an ridicule. se rendre la fable, la risee, de tout le monde. IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 233 to do nothing right, to he 7Hght to, that served him right ! to have a right to, right or lorong, right and wrong, iJidiscriminately, my ears are ringing, tingling, to rise from (meals), at your risk, to roast, to roll in riches, to make room for, to clean the room, you must not rouse the sleeping lion, let sleeping dogs lie, to make a row ivith, rude behavior, to be on the brink of ruin, there is no rule without exception, a rumor abroad, to run aioay. to run one's head against, to run, to glance, over (a book), to run over (p.), to run through one' s property , to run up and down, all of us, good and bad together, ill future, to jog on, not half that loas necessary, at sunrise, ne faire rien qui vaille. avoir raison de. *c'est bien fait ! | c'est paiD benit. avoir le droit de. a tort ou a raison. a tort et a travers. *les oreilles me tinteut. sortir de. a vos risques et perils, faire rotir. nager dans I'opulence, Tor. faire place a. faire la chambre. il ne faut pas eveiller le chat qui dort. *faire une scene a (p.). une conduite grossiere. etre a deux doigts de sa perte. il n'y a point de regie sans ex- ception. un bruit qui court. s'enfuir ; ^prendre la clef des champs; *prendre ses jambes a son cou. donner de la tete contre. Jeter les yeux sur ; parcourir . passer sur le corps a. manger son bien. courir 9a et la. tons tant que nous sommes. tant bons que mauvais. a ravenir. *aller son petit train, son petit bonhomme de chemin. il n'en fallait pas la moitie. au lever du soleil. to be safe, to arrive safely, no sooner said than done, 40. etre en surete, bors de danger, arriver a bon port ; arriver sans accident, aussitot dit aussitot fait. 234 IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. to have a saily to set sail, to he a good sailor, for the sake of, it is not for your sake, I do the same, show us a sample of your skill, to demand, to give, satisfaction for, to have, to take, to obtain, satis- faction for, to be, to remain, satisfied icith (th.), to be satisfied about, to be satisfied about it, to be satisfied loith the truth of (th.) , to satisfy (p.) fully, to serve (p.) loith the same sauce, to be saucy, it is so much saved out of the fire, to say (th.) in (j^.) face, that is to say, so to say, if I may say so, I can scarcely, to put (p.) on a lorong scent, to be upon the scent, to be a scholar, to have full, free, scope, to get out of a scrape, lohat a scrawl I to scream, to scruple at or to, not to be over-scrupulous, at sea, by the seaside, se promener, f aire une promenade, en bateau, mettre a la voile ; partir. f aire un bon mariu ; avoir le pied marin. pour I'amour de. *ce n'est pas pour vos beaux yeux. c'est ce que je fais. donnez-nous un echantillon de votre savoir-faire, demander, donner or faire raison de {th.) a (p.). avoir or tirer raison de. se contenter de. etre satisfait ; avoir I'esprit en repos sur. en avoir le coeur net. etre convaincu de la verite de. ne laisser rien a desirer a (p.). * payer {p.) de la meme monnaie. * faire Timpertinent. * c'est autant de pris sur Tennemi. *dire {th.) au nez de, a la barbe de. c'est-a-dire. pour ainsi dire, j'ai de la peine a. donner le change a ; faire prendre le change a. etre sur la voie. etre homme de lettres; etre fort instruit. avoir libre carriere ; * avoir les coudees f ranches, se tirer d'embarras, d'affaire, d'un mauvais pas. * quels pattes de mouche! Jeter, or pousser, un cri, or des oris, se faire scrupule de. * avoir la conscience large, en mer. au bord de la mer. IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 235 pray he seated! to second a motion^ to he second to none^ to huy (th.) second handf the secret is out, to keep o?ie's views, designs, secret, to he security for, to see (p.) to the door, to see (p.) home, to see through it, not to see at cdl, to see ichat (p.) means, to let see, to show, let me see ! let us see ! we shall see that ! loithout seeming to oh serve, as it seems, you are not fit to he seen, against all common sense, he sees no farther than the end of his nose, a long series of reproaches, seriously, joking aside or apart, I cannot understand, to do as much as to, a godsend, a vnndfall, a treasure trove, a stampede, to take no end of trouhle. veuillez vous asseoir ; donnez-vous la peine de vous asseoir. appuyer une motion, ne le ceder a personue. acheter (th.) de rencontre, de hasard. *on a decouvert le pot au rose, cacher, or couvrir, son jeu. repondre pour. conduire (p.) jusqu'a la porte. reconduire (p.) chez lui. voir ce que c'est. *n'y voir goutte. voir venir (p.). f aire voir (th.) a (p.). voyons ! c'est ce que nous allons voir ; nous verrons bien. sans faire semblant de rien. a ce qu'il parait. *vous n'etes pas presentable, en depit du bon sens. *il ne Yoit pas plus loin que le bout de son nez. *une kyrielle de reproches. raillerie a part. j'y perds mon latin, faire taut que de. une bonne trouvaille. un sauve qui pent. . *se mettre en quatre pour. 41. to serve for or as, to serve one right, it serves him right, to do service to, to he of any service to, the way to set ahout it, to set ahout (th.), servir de. traiter (p.) comme (il) le merite. c'est bien fait! il ne I'a pas vole I rendre service cr un service a. etre utile a, servir. la maniere de s'y prendre, se mettre a, s'occuper de, se mettre a faire. 236 IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. to set about it, to set fire to, to set up for, to set up again, to set a good example to, to set (p.) at ease, to set a-going, to set to rights, to be set on, to be bent on, to settle an account, to settle to (th.), to get settled, to find a situation, a berth, a severe cold in the head, to shade one's self from, to shake hands, to shame, it's a shame ! for shame I to share in, to shelter one's self from, not to know what shift to make, to be put to one's last shift. to be shipwrecked, to shiver with cold, to be, to stand, in (p.) shoes, to walk in (p.) shoes, if you icere in my shoes, to go shopping, to be short of, should he happen to knoiv, to shoio one's face, to show (p.) in, to shoio (th.), to make a great shoio of, to shrink from, to shut the door in one's face^ to shut in or up^ to be sick, s'y prendre. mettre le feu a. se donner pour ; faire ; s'eriger en. remettre sur pied. donner a {p.) un bon exemple. mettre {p.) a I'aise. *faire aller; donner le branle. remettre tout a fait ; remettre en ordre. etre determine a. arreter un compte. s'arreter, se fixer, a. se caser. un gros rhume de cerveau. se mettre a I'abri de. donner, se donner, une poignee de mains, faire honte a. c'est honteux ! fi done ! fi ! avoir part a. se mettre a I'abri de. * ne savoir de quel bois faire fleche ; *ne savoir a quel saint se vouer ; ne savoir ou donner de la tete ; en etre aux expedients, faire naufrage. grelotter de froid. etre a la place de {p.). courir sur les brisees de. si vous etiez a ma place, aller faire des emplettes. manquer de ; etre court de. s'il venait a savoir. se montrer, paraitre. faire entrer. faire voir {th.) a (p.). faire parade de. reculer devant. fermer la porte au nez. enfermer. avoir mal au coeur. IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 237 to he sick of (th.), to he sea-sick, to side lolth, to side against, to take the light, or the lorong, side, to attack (p.) on his weak side, I am on your side, the right side {of a stuff, etc.), the wrong side {of a stuff\ etc.), everything has a wrong and a right side, on hoth sides, to hear hoth sides, a grand sight, out of sight, out of mind, to silence, silence gives consent, I cannot guess it, don't do it, to laugh in one's sleeve, not to know what to say, etre degotite ; etre las de. avoir le mal de mer. etre du parti de. etre contre. prendre le boD, or le mauvais, cote. prendre {p.) par son endroit sensible, je suis des votres. I'endroit (d'une etoffe, etc.). I'envers (d'une etoffe, etc.). cbaque medaille a son revers. de part et d'autre. * entendre les deux cloches. un spectacle superbe. loin des yeux, loin du coeur. imposer silence a ; fermer la bouche a. qui ne dit mot, consent, j'y perds mon latin, n'en faites rien. rire dans la barbe, rire sous cape, ne savoir que dire. 42. to sit down (to meals), to sit for one's portrait, to sit up loith a sick person, to sit close, to he out of a situation, to try one's skill, to he nothiiig hut skin and hone, to he a skinflint, to sleep (in such a place or such a bed) , to sleep soundly (securely), to sleep like a top, to sleep very late, to start out of one's sleep, sleep upon it, to pretend to he sleeping, se mettre a table, poser pour son portrait, veiller un malade. se serrer. etre sur le pave, essay er son savoir-faire, n'avoir que la peau et les os; * avoir la peau eollee sur les os. *tondre un oeuf. coucher. dormir sur les deux oreilles. *dormir comme une marmotte. dormir la grasse matinee, s'eveiller en sursaut. la nuit porte conseil. faire semblant de dormir. 238 IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. he loho steeps dines, to slip, to make a slip, to slip aioay from the company, to give the slip to, to he too sloio (a clock, etc.), on the sly, by stealth, a smart answer, a cutting answer, a smart reply, a smart saying, to smell close, he is all smiles and kindness, there is no smoke loithoutfire, there is a snake in the grass (figurative) , to lay a snare for (p.), to fall into a snare, it snoivs, there has been a heavy fall of snoiv, Mr. so and so, if so, so far so good, and so on, and so forth, somehow, somehoiv or other, very sorry, a strange sort of a man, to call a spade a spade, to have no time to spare, to lose, to have some spare time, to have to spare, to spare (p.) the hearing of (th.), to speak for itself, to speak highly of, to speak plainly , to begin to speak, to speak for the rest, not to speak any more of, it is my turn to speak, to speak the truth, qui dort dine, faire un faux pas. fausser compagnie. * faire faux boud a (p.). retarder. en cachette. une reponse mordante. une vive replique. un mot fin. sentir le renferme. *il fait patte de velours. *il n'y a pas de fume'e sans feu. *il y a quelque anguille sous roche. tendre, dresser, un piege a (p.). donner dans un piege. il neige ; il tombe de la neige. il est tombe beaucoup de neige. M. un tel. s'il en est ainsi ; si c'est ainsi. cela va bien jusqu'ici ; jusqu'a present cela ne va pas mal. et ainsi de suite, tant bien que mal. on ne sait comment, tresfache; desole. *un drole d'homme ; *un drole de corps, appeler un chat un chat, n 'avoir pas de temps a perdre. * avoir de la marge. en avoir de reste ; en avoir plus qu'il n'en faut." faire a (p.) grace de (th.). parler tout seul ; parler de sol. dire du bien de. parler franchement. prendre la parole, porter la parole, tirer le rideau sur. j'ai la parole, dire la verite. IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 239 too long speeches, full speed, God speed you ! to spend (money), to spend money in cm extravagant manner, to spend (time), a spendthrift, in high spirits, to be in high spirits, to revive (p.) S2)iriis, to cheer, to have a spite, a pique, against (p), to split the difference, he is a very good spoil-sport, a marplot, in loanton sport, loith a cheerful heart, to buy cheap, to go to bed, do help me, to mxike a good bargain^ to be pretty well, to be part of, nevertheless, to come to the same thing, to set the table for six, to take unawares, des discours a perte d'haleine. ventre a terre ; a toutes jambes. Dieu vous protege ! depenser. Jeter I'argent par les fenetres. passer. un panier perce, un mange-tout. en grande gaiete; fort en train. *etre en train ; etre tres-gai. reraonter le courage a {p.). en vouloir a; *avoir une dent contre. partager le differend par la moitie. *c'est un vrai rabat-joie. de gaiete de coeur. acheter a bon marclie. se coucher. donnez moi done un coup de main. faire un bon marche. aller tout doucement. laire partie de. tout de meme. rcvenir au meme. m.ttre six converts. prendre au deporvu. 43. to make sport, to banter about, to make sport of ov ivith (p.), on the spot, up stairs, down stairs, to show, to send, to ask (p.) up stairs, a private staircase, his life, his honoris at stake, you play for a great stake, to stamp (letters, etc.), to put a postage stamp to a letter, to be of the right stamp f badiner sur. se moquer, se jouer de. sur les lieux ; sur-le-cliamp. en haut, en bas. faire monter. un escalier derobe. il y va de sa vie, de son honneur. vous jouez gros jeu. timbrer. affrancliir une lettre. *etre marque au bon coin. 240 IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. to stand out against^ to cope with, to stand by (to defend) , to stand for, to stand to (an opinion) , to stick to, to stand upon ceremony j to stand staring, to stand, to endure, to come to a stand, to a stop, hoio can one stand it ? I cannot stand it, as matters stand, to sit, to stand, still, to befriends of old standing, and so it stands now, to stare at, on, upon, to stare, to look (p.) in the face, to be ill-starred, to start out of one's sleep, to get the start, to have the start of (p.) by {two hours) , to start, you startled me, to make a stay, to step out of (a carriage) , step by step, within a step of, to stick, to hold to, to keep to, a stitch in time saves nine, not to stir out, to leave no stone unturned, not to leave one stone standing on another, a rolling stone gathers no moss, to put a stop to, after a storm comes a calm, the best of the story, an old woman'' s story, tenir tete a, resister a. soutenir, defendre, tenir pour. tenir lieu de. s'en tenir a. *faire des ceremonies. faire, ouvrir, de grands yeux. supporter. s'arreter ; faire une pause. comment peut-on y tenir ? je n'y tiens plus. sur le pied {or au point) ou en sont les choses. r ester tranquille. etre amis de vieille date. Yoila oil en sont les choses. regarder fixement. regarder {p.) en face, etre ne sous une mauvaise etoile. s'eveiller en sursaut. prendre les devants. avoir (deux heures) d'avance sur tressaillir. vous m'avez fait peur. faire un sejour. descendre de. pas a pas. a deux pas de. s'en tenir a. *un point fait a temps en sauve mille. *ne pas bouger de chez sol. remuer ciel et terre. ne pas laisser pierre sur pierre. pierre qui roule n'amasse pas de mousse, mettre fin a ; faire cesser ; en finir avec. apres la pluie le beau temps, le plus beau de I'histoire. une histoire de bonne femme. IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 241 the same story over again ! the story goes onto say, as the story goes, straight along, as straight as a dart, you should do it in a straight- forward way, strange to say, to relate! he is a stranger to 7ne, at a stretch, strictly speaking, to be striking, to he evident, to have two strings to one's how, to strive loith all one's might, it has struck one, to study, to he undergoing a com- plete course of education, to study hard, it is very stupid, as stupid as an oicl, to make sure of, to keep (p.) in suspense, to sivarm with, to sioear hy all that is good, to draio the sivord, to put to the sword, it is cut out of the whole cloth, you can't have too much of a good thing, that goes against the gratn, to hit hard, to scream, yell. ^toujours la meme chanson! on ajoute. a ce que dit Thistoire. tout droit. *droit comme un jonc, un i, un cierge. * il ne f aut pas y aller par quatre chemins. chose etrange ! *je ne le connais ni d'Eve ni d'Adam. tout d'une haleine ; d'un trait, a proprement parler. *sauter aux yeux. avoir deux cordes a son arc. suer sang et eau. il est une heure sonnee ; une heure est sonnee. faire ses etudes. travailler ferme ; *piocher. *c'est bien bete. *bete comme une oie ; sot comme une buse. s'assurer de. tenir {p.) ensuspens; *tenir (p.) le bee dans I'eau. etre rempli de. *jurer ses grands dieux. mettre Tepee a la main, passer au fil de I'epee. c'est un conte fait a plaisir. abondance de biens ne nuit pas. le coeur ne lui en dit pas. ne pas y aller de main morte. crier a tue-tete. to succeed to, to come after, to succeed, to he successful, his hook did not succeed. 44. succeder a. reussir a ; venir a bout de. son livre n'a pas pris. 242 IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. a success beyond measure, all of a sudden, suffice it to say, sufficient unto the day is the evil thereof, one must suit one's self to the times, to circumstances, that suits me, done I to put one's Sunday clothes on, to supplant (p.), to he sure (of or that), to he sure to, to he sure not to, sure enough, to he sure ! sure! I sent it, I am quite sure of it, I suspected it ! my head swims, do not utter a syllable of it, to sit doivn to tahle, to rise from tahle, to turn the tables on or upon (p.), the tables are turned, to take literally, to take after (p.), to take an airing, to take aivay, to take care, to take care (to beware) , to take care not to, take all together, on the lohole, take it or not, to take one's departure, to take to one's heels, to take a high tone, to take well or ill, un succes fou. tout a coup. qu'il suffi.se de dire. a chaque jour suffit sa peine. a la guerre comme a la guerre. *cela me va, j'en suis ! s'endimancher. courir sur les brisees de ; *couper I'herbe sous le pied a. s'assurer. ne pas mauquer de. se bien garder de. a coup stir. certain ement ; mais certainement. tout de bon, sans plaisanter, je I'ai envoye. *j'en mettrais ma main au feu. je m'en doutais bien ! la tete me tourne. n'en dites rien ; ne f aites semblant de rien. se mettre a table. se lever, sortir, de table. *renvoyer le de, la balle, a {p.). la medaille est renversee; les affaires ont change de face. prendre {th.) au pied de la lettre. ressembler a, tenir de. prendre I'air; faire une pro- menade. emporter, enlever, emmener {p.). avoir soin de. prendre garde. se bien garder de ; n'avoir garde. a tout prendre. a prendre ou a laisser. partir, s'en aller. * prendre ses jambes a son cou. *le prendre bien haut. prendre bien ou mal {th.) ; prendre (r/i.)enboune,enmauvaisepart. IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 243 to take (th.) ill, to take ill or amiss if, to take (a letter, etc.) tOy to take a joke, to take notice of, to take {prizes), to take it upon one's self, to take (p.) to be, to take (p.) to be {20 years) old, to take to (th.), to take a trip, that's a thorn taken out of his side, to tell tales, to talk nonsense, to talk big, to talk it over, to talk of things one does not knoiv, to be the talk of, the talk of all the toivn, all that is idle talk, it is as light as air, they talked of you at dinner, to be a head taller than, to have a hard task, to suit the taste of, to teach (p.) manners, good breed- ing, with tears in his eyes, tears came into his eyes, to abound, to believe easily, * broken chairs, do you come ivith us f a deliberate system, resolution, to let knoio, you look younger than you are, to note doicn, as ivell as one could, prendre {th.) de travers. troiiver mauvais que {subjunc- tive) . porter (une lettre, etc.) a. entendre raillerie. faire attention a ; remarquer. remporter (des prix) . *en faire son affaire. IDrendre quelqu'un pour. donner a {p.) (vingt) ans. prendre du gout ]30ur ; *mordre a. faire un petit voyage. *il s'est tire une forte epine du pied. faire des contes. *dire des betises. *le prendre bien haut. en reparler. parler comme un aveugle des couleurs. faire I'entretien de. I'entretien de toute la ville. *autant en em^Dorte le vent. il fut question de vous a diner, depasser {p.) de la tete. avoir fort a faire. etre du gout, au gout, de. apprendre a {}:>.) vivre. les larmes aux yeux. les larmes lui sont venues aux yeux. foisonner, y avoir a foison. prendre pour argent comptant. des chaises boiteuses. etes-vous des notres ? " un parti pris. faire savoir. on vous donnerait moins que vous n'avez. prendre note de. tant bien que mal. 244 IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 45. on these termSy thank God! he may thank himself for it^ no thanks to him^ as to that, thafs it, through thick and thin, to he just the thing, it is no such thing, from one thing to another, he came to speak . . ., poor thing ! it is the best thing I can do, it is quite another thing, the thing is to, as things go, one of two things, of all things, above all things, I should think so ! to think it over, to think it amiss if, to think proper to, to think ivell, or ill, of, to be so thirsty, this, that, and the other, no thoroughfare, no road this way, though it were only, even though, xoere I, a thought strikes me, at the very thought of it, to speak out one's thoughts, to be threadbare, to thrbio one's self on everybody, to thunder. a ces conditions-la. Dieu merci ! grace a Dieu ! il ne pent s'en prendre qu'a lui- meme, c'est sa faute. ce n'est pas grace a lui. quant a cela ; pour le coup, c'est cela ! a travers tous les obstacles ; a tort et a travers. etre (son) affaire, point du tout ; cela n'est pas vrai. *de fil en aiguille, il en yint a parler . . . la pauvre creature ! c'est ce que j'ai de mieux a faire ; c'est mon i)lus court parti. c'est tout autre chose ; * c'est une autre paire de manches. il s'agit de. *par le temps qui court ; *du train dont 9a va. de deux choses I'une. avant {or sur) toute chose; par- dessus toutes choses. je le crois hien ! y reflechir. trouver mauvais q^xQ {subjunctive). juger convenable de, trouver bon. avoir bonne, or mauvaise, opinion de. etre si alter e. *et ci et 9a. on ne passe pas ! ne f ut-ce que ... quand bien meme ; dusse-je. il me vient une idee, rien que d'y penser. dire sa fa9on de penser. montrer la corde. se Jeter a la tete de tout le monde. tonner {impers.). IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 245 ticket of admission^ single ticket, return ticket, till then, till to-morrow , from that time, from time to time, by this time, in a short time, in a proper time and place, all in good time, at the appointed time, at the same time, some time or other, with time, in the long run, at length, in his father's time, just in time to, this time I have you, time hangs heavy upon my hands, to come in time, in good time, to hit the time, to take the time from, as times go, in these days, to have a very smooth tongue, to have it at the tip of one's tongue, to go at it tooth and nail, topsy-turvy , the beaten track, every one to his trade, to translate at sight, a transparent artifice, to treat (p.) loith, to treat loith kindness, it is my first trial, in a trice, in less than no time, it is all over icith, to border on, to fight to the death, to give notice, so late at night, billet d 'entree. billet d'aller. billet d'aller et retour. en attendant ; jusque-la. a demain. des lors. de temps en temps. a I'heure qu'il est ; maintenant. sous pen. en temps et lieu. toutes Glioses en leur temps. a I'heure con venue. en meme temps. un jour ou I'autre; un de ces jours, a la longue. du vivant de son pere. a temps pour. *pour le coup je yous y prends. le temps me dure. yenir a temps pour ; venir a pro- pos ; venir a point nomme. prendre bien son temps, regler sa montre sur. *par le temps qui court. * avoir la langue doree. I'avoir sur le bout de la langue. ne pas y aller de main morte. sens dessus-dessous. le sentier battu. chacun son metier, traduire a livre ouvert. |une finesse cousue de fil blanc. regaler de. faire des amities a. c'est mon coup d'essai, en moins de rien. e'en est fait de. toucher a. combattre a outrance. prevenir, faire savoir. a uiie heure si mauvaise. 246 IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. as mattei^s stand, it's a little too much, au point ou en sont les choses. c'est par trop fort. 46. to trouble one's self about, to cause trouble to (p.), to put (p.) to trouble, to be at, to give one's self, the trouble to, to take a great deal of trouble, to be in trouble, to bring one's self into trouble, you have played the truant, if it be true that, that is true enough, to fill, to pack, one's trunk, to trust to, to trust (p.) loith, to try one's best, to be trying to, to turn, to become, to turn to good account, to turn aside, to turn the tables, to turn the conversaAion to, to turn out of doors, to turn pale, at every turn, each in his turn, by turns, it is my turn to, one good turn deserves another, if things were to be done tivice, all loould be wise, in the tioinkling of an eye, to be unacquainted tuith, to take (p.) unawares, to be uncomfortable, to be undeceived about (p.)> to undergo an operation, s'embarrasser, s'inquieter, se mettre en peine, de. causer de I'embarras a. prendre, se donner, la peine de. se donner du mal. etre dans la peine, se mettre dans la peine, dans I'embarras. vous avez fait I'ecole buissonniere. si tant est que. c'est bien vrai. faire sa malle. se fier a. fier, confier {th,) a. faire de son mieux. faire ses efforts pour. se faire, devenir. mettre a profit, tirer parti de. detourner la tete. voir le revers de la medaille. faire tomber la conversation sur. mettre a la porte ; cbasser. changer de visage ; palir. a tout propos ; a tout bout de champ, a tour de role ; tour a tour, c'est a moi a. un service en vaut un autre, si jeunesse savait, et si vieillesse pouvait. en un clin d'oeil; en moins de rien. ignorer, ne pas connaitre. prendre au depourvu. etre mal a son aise. etre detrompe sur le compte de {p.) . se faire operer. IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 247 to understand how to, to let (p.) understand, to undertake to, to be uneasy, anxious, about, unexpectedly , there shall be no unfairness, unjitfor service, to behave in an ungrateful man- ner to (p.), unknoicn to me, unprepared, to be unprovided ivith, a good action never remains un- rewarded, it is unseemly to, unbecoming to, to buy (th.) unseen, blindfolded, to say whatever comes uppermost, to use, to make a good, or bad, use of, to be of use, to be out of use, obsolete, to use (p.) IV ell or ill, to use ambiguous terms, to accustom one's self to, in every particidar, to get something to do, to get frightened, to pay money, s'entendre a. donner a entendre a {p.) ', faire compreudre a (p.)- se charger de. etre inquiet sur ; s' in quieter de ; etre en peine de. a I'improviste. il n'y aura pas de passe-droit. hors de service, payer {p.) d' ingratitude. a mon insu. au depourvu. etre sans ; n'avoir pas de. un bienfait n'est jamais iDcrdu. il est inconvenant de. acheter {th.) les yeux fermes. *dire tout ce qui (nous) passe par la tete. se servir de. user bien, on mal, de. etre utile a (p.), servir a {p.). etre bors d'usage; n'etre plus d' usage. en user, en agir, bien on mal, avec, traiter bien on mal. parler a mots converts, s'accoutumer a ; se faire a. de point en point, trouver quelque chose a faire. s'effrayer. verser de 1' argent. 47. to be of no use, it is of no use for you to try, lohat is the use ofP of what use is it to? what use is it for me to ? of what use is that to me ? it is of no use, ne servir de rien. vous avez beau faire. a quoi sert de? que sert de? a quoi bon? que gagnerai-je a ? a quoi cela peut-il me servir ? c'est inutile. 248 IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. to he used to do, to usher in, as usual, utterly, to he in vain for, to set value on, to set too great a value upon one's self, to value highly, not to value money, to he of some value, to venture to say, to he a victim to, to vie in cunning, to vie with one another, to take a nearer view of, to use violence, to he in good voice, to come to the vote, to vouch for the truth, to lay a wager, to accept the wager, to loaitfor, to wait on or upon (to serve), to wait on or upon (to visit), to keep waiting, to walk, to walk (for pleasure) , to take a walk, idle words, mere talk, no heed is given to what he says, avoir coutume de. introduire, annoncer. comme a Fordinaire; comme de coutume. de fond en comble. avoir beau. attacher du prix, de I'importance, a ; faire cas de. se faire trop valoir; * faire le rencheri. faire grand cas de, tenir beau- coup a. ne pas regarder a I'argent. avoir quel que valeur. ne pas craindre de dire. etre en butte a. jouer au plus fin. * faire a qui mieux mieux. voir, observer, de plus pres. en venir aux voies de fait. etre bien en voix. aller aux voix. garantir la verite. faire la gageure, le pari ; parier. tenir le pari. attendre. servir. aller voir. faire attendre. marcher, aller a pied. se promener. faire une promenade, un tour de promenade, un tour. des paroles en I'-air. autant en emporte le veut. 48. to walk (tioo miles) , to walk over, it is ten minutes' walk, as 1 10 as walking, I saio. faire (deux milles) a pied, parcourir (un endroit) a pied, pousser j usque. 11 y a dix minutes de marche. tout en me promenant j'ai vu. IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 249 to ivanderfrom, to loant (th.), to be ivithout, to loant with (th.), to he in want of (th.), for want of, you are wanted, how much is loanting 9 there is hut little loanting, not to he lo anting in, for wanton sport, ivants three francs of the sum, I loarrant it, loaste paper, to waste time, to loatch over, to he on the ivatch, to set a ivatch, my mouth waters at it, still waters run deep, to make loay for (p.), to he in the way, to go the right ivay in, to have one's own way. to get out of the way, to go a great ivay loith (p.), to lead the ivay, to lose one's way, not to know one's ivay, to put (p.) on the right way, not to know what way to turn, the right way, the right way (method), the wrong way, ^ the wrong ivay (method), half way, this way, that way, which way ? on the ivay, in every way, this way and that, s'ecarter de. manquer de. vouloir faire de. avoir besoin de. faute de. on vous demande. de combien s'en faut-il? il ne s'en faut guere. ne pas manquer de. de gaiete de coeur. il manque trois francs a la somme. je vous en reponds. du papier de rebut. perdre le temps. avoir I'oeil sur. * avoir I'oeil au guet. regler une montre. ^I'eau m'en vient a la bouche. 11 n'y a pire eau que celle qui dort. faire place a. gener, embarrasser. se bien prendre a. faire ses fantaisies ; faire ses vo- lontes ; en faire a sa tete ; * avoir ses coudees franches. s'oter de la ; se ranger, avoir beaucoup d 'influence sur (p.). marcher en tete ; conduire. se perdre. etre desoriente. mettre {p.) sur la vole, ne savoir ou donner de la tete. le bon chemin. la bonne maniere. le mauvais chemin. la mauvaise maniere. a moitie chemin ; a mi-chemin. par ici ; de ce c6te-ci. par la ; de ce cote-la. par oil ? en chemin ; chemin faisant. de toute fa9on. 9a et la. 250 IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. on my way to, on my loay froniy a great way, the shortest vmy, the shortest way (method), there is no other loay, to be very weak, it is not loearahle, in this cold iveather, he is a perfect weathercock, to he wedded to an opinion, ill weeds grow apace, this day loeek, to iveepfor {joy, etc.), to iveep bitterly, to be loorth one's loeight in gold, to give a hearty loelcome to (p.)? to be ivelcome (p.), to be welcome to (th.), and welcome, you are welcome to it, it was as loellfor you, it is very loellfor you to, ivell or ill, as ivell as he can or could, ivell done !' well and good ! all is well that ends ivell. well! I never! as it were, if it were not for him, but for him, to be ivet to the skin, I loill tell you ivhat, ivhat of it ? what of that ? comme j'allais a ; en allant a. comrne je revenais de. bien loin. le plus court chemin. le plus court parti. il n'y "a pas d'autre chemin {literal) ; il n'y a pas de milieu {figurative), n'ayoir qu'un souffle de vie. cela n'est pas de mise. par le froid qu'il fait, c'est une vraie girouette. *etre coiffe d'une opinion, mauvaise herbe croit toujours. il y a aujourd'hui huit jours {past), d'aujourd'hui en huit ( future) . pleurer de (joie, etc.). pleurer a chaudes larmes. valoir son pesant d'or. faire fete a. etre le bienvenu. etre au service de {p.). c'est bien a votre service, il est, or c'est, a votre service, bien vous a pris de. vous avez beau, taut bien que mal. de son mieux. a la bonne heure ! la fin couronne I'oeuvre ; qui veut la fin veut les moyens ; rira bien qui rira le dernier ; % tout est bien qui finit bien. est-ce bien possible ! a-t-on jamais vu! pour ainsi dire, sans lui. etre trempe jusqu'aux os. ^je vous dirai ce que c'est. *eh bien! apres? qu'est-ce a dire? IDIOMATIC VERBS x\.ND PHRASES. 251 what is that to yoii? to pvt a spoke in the ivheels, to lohile one^s time aivay, to be loorth one's while, to find it worth one's ivhile, for this long lohile, while I am about it, while my hand is in, what ivhim has got head 9 to whisper, the very day, the very thought, even the thought, at first view, with a view to, visibly, on a visits anyiohere, on the contrary y to be desperate, he's a perfect bore, to have self-possession, I ivonder, qu'est-ce que cela vous fait ? Jeter, or mettre, des batons dans les roues, tuer le temps, valoir la peine de. y trouver son compte. depuis longtemps. tandis que j'ai la main a la pate. into your ^quelle mouche vous a pique? dire a I'oreille. le jour meme. la seule pensee. a premiere vue ; au x)remier abord. dans I'intention de. a vue d'oeil. en visite. n'importe oil. tant s'en faut. avoir le desespoir dans I'ame. c'est un vrai ours. avoir de 1' aplomb. je voudrais bien savoir. 49. to bear (p.) ill-icill, en vouloir a. where there is a iviU there is a quand on a de la bonne volonte, ivay, on ne manque pas de moyens, vouloir, c'est pouvoir. willing or not, willing or unioill- bon gre mal gre; de gre ou de ing, force. to be willing to, etre pret a ; ne demander pas < mieux (que de) . vjillingly, de plein gre^ let them laugh icho vjin, rira bien qui rira le dernier. to win over, gagner. God tempers theivind to the shorn |a brebis tondue Dieu mesure le lamb, vent. it is an ill ivind that blovjs nobody a quel que chose malheur est bon. good, to have a great windfall, avoir une bonne aubaine, 252 IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. it ivas a loindfall, it loas a treas- ure trove, to loink at (a fault, etc.), not to be the tciser for it, to ivish (p.) a happy neio year, to wish one's self a hundred miles away, as much as one can wish^ to wish very much to, to be full of wit, sallies ofioit, to seek for, to strain after, wit, to be thought a ivit, it is luith us as with, icithout rhyme or reason, to have one's wits about one, to be at one's wits' end, to torture one^s wits, to live by one's wits, to bs frightened out of one', wits, to be extremely ivitty, his conversation is very loitty, a looman must have her way, no wonder, for a luonder, to tvonder at, I ivonder if, when, how, why, to be loont to, to send word to, to be a man of his word, to break one's word, to take (p.) at his word, not to dare to say a word, *c'etait une bonne aubaine. fermer les yeux sur. ne pas en etre plus avance. souhaiter la bonne an nee a. vouloir etre a cent pieds sous terre. a plaisir ; a discretion, mourir d'envie de. petiller d'esprit, des saillies. faire de 1' esprit, passer pour un homme d'esprit il en est de nous comme de. sans rime ni raison. etre sur ses gardes ; avoir sa presence d'esprit. etre au bout de son latin, *ne savoir plus de quel bois faire fleche; *ne savoir a quel saint se vouer. se creuser I'esprit. etre un chevalier d'industrie. *perdre la tete. * avoir de I'esprit jusqu'au bout des doigts. sa conversation petille d'esprit. ce que femme vent, Dieu le veut. ce n'est pas etonnant ; il n'y a rien d'etonnant. par extraordinaire ; chose extraor- dinaire. s'etonner de. je m'etonne bien si, etc.; je vou- drais bien savoir si, etc: avoir coutume de. faire savoir a etre homme de parole. manquer a, ne pas tenir, sa parole ; s'en dedire. prendre {p.) au mot. n'oser souffler. IDIOMATIC VERBS AXD PHRASES. 253 to pronounce the icord, to let out the loord, by loord of mouthy viva voce, take mij word for it, I will not say a loord about it, it won't go any farther, not to get a single loordfrom, an honest man is as good as his word, more words than deeds, vain loords, empty loords, not to inince one's words, to work by the job, a work requiring much time, that is not the work of a few hours, for all the world, it is the ivay of the icorld, such is the world, such is life, to laugh at vjhat the world may say, to grow worse and ivorse, not to be the ivorse for it, to make bad ivorse, to make it worse ! to make matters worse, to be worse of, to have the worst of it, let the worst come to the worst, to be worth (p.), not to be worth a penny, not to be worth much, - he is worth his weight in gold, it is not worth while, a soft answer turns away wrath, to be wrecked, to sing most wretchedly, to write a beautiful hand, that is the lorong book, that is wrong of him, oh, yes ! yes, indeed! laclier le mot ; trancher le mot. de vive voix. croyez-m'en. *cela n'ira pas plus loin. ne pas arracher une parole de. un hoiinete homme n'a que sa parole, plus de bruit que de besogne. des paroles en I'air. *ne pas macher ses paroles, travailler aux pieces, un ouvrage de lougue lialeine. cela ne se fait ijas du jour au lendemain , pour tout au monde. ainsi va le monde. se moquer du qu'en dira-t-on. aller de mal en pis, de pis en pis. ne pas s'en trouver plus mal. *jeter le manche apres la cognee. pour surcroit de mallieur. etre raoins avance. avoir le dessous de ; en avoir le dementi, au pis aller. etre riche de ; avoir, n 'avoir pas un sou vaillant. ne pas valoir grand'chose. il vaut son i^esant d'or. *le jeu ne vaut pas la chandelle. petite pluie abat grand vent, faire naufrage. * chanter a faire pitie. avoir une belle ecriture. ce n'est pas le livre qu'il faut. c'est mal a lui ; c'est mal de sa part. *ob que si ! 254 IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. in a fortnight from yesterday ^ hut yesterday, to he heside one^s self ivith joy, she enjoyed herself to her hearVs content, not to say a loord, *si fait ! si! mais si! d'hier en quinze, hier encore. ne pas se sentir de joie, elle s'en est donne a cceur joie. ne pas desserer les dents. III. POPULAR SAYINGS. 1. All roads lead to Rome. 2. All is icell that ends loell. 3. All is not gold that glitters. 4. A stitch in time saves nine. 5. A rolling stone gathers no moss. A word to the ivise is sufficient. A man is knoivn by his friends, A miss is as good as a mile. A good name is better than riches. A man^s house is his castle. A new broom sweeps clean. A bird in the hand is icorth two in the bush. A burnt child di^eadsfire. Barking dogs seldom bite. Beggars can't be choosers. Birds oj a feather flock to- gether. Better late than never. Charit^j begins at h(fme. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. Contentment is better than riches. DonH count your chickens before they are hatched. 21. Diamond cut diamond. Tons les chemins vont a Rome. La fill couroniie I'oeuvre. Tout ce qui reluit n'est pas or, Uii point fait a temps en sauve cent. Pierre qui roule n'amasse pas de mousse. A bon entendeur salut ! Dis-moi qui tu hantes, je te dirai qui tu es. Faute d'un point Martin perdit son ane. Bonne reuommee vaut mieux que ceintLire doree. Charbonnier est maitre cbez lui. Tout nouveau, tout beau. Un tiens vaut mieux que deux tu r auras. Cbat ecbaude craint I'eau froide. Cbien qui aboie ne mord pas. Ne cboisit pas qui emprunte. Qui se ressemble s' assemble. Mieux vaut tard que jamais. Cbarite bien ordonnee commence avec soi-meme. Contentement passe ricbesse. Brebis comptees. le loup les mange. II ne faut pas acbeter la corde avant d'avoir le yeau. Fin contre fin ne vaut rien pour doublure. 255 256 POPULAR SAYTXGS. 22. Evil to him ivho evil thinks. 23. Foreioarned is forearmed. 24. Give the devil his due. 25. Grasp all, lose all. 26. Good reckonings malce good friends. 27. Honor to ivhom honor is due. 28 . He laugh s best ivho laughs last. 29. He loas born ivith a silver spoon in his mouth. 30. He is penny ivise and pound foolish. 31. He reckons luithout his host. 32. He's a chip of the old block. 33. It is loell to have tivo strings to one's boio. 34. It is an ill ivind that blows nobody good. 35. /// iveeds groio apace. 36. Like father, like son. 37. Let well enough alone. 38. Love me, love my dog. 39. Misfortunes never come singly. 40. Man proposes and God dis- poses. 41. Many a little makes a mickle. 42. Money makes the mare go. 43. Make hay ivhile the sun shines. 44. Nothing venture, nothing have. 45. Necessity is the mother of in- vention. 46. Necessity knows no law. 47. No sooner said than done. 48. Never judge by appearances. 49. Other people's misfortunes af- fect us but little. Honi soit qui mal y pense. Uii bon averti en vaut deux. Ne faites pas le diable plus noir ' qu'il n'est. Qui trop embrasse mal etreint. Les bons comptes font les bons amis. A tout seigneur, tout honneur. Rira bien qui rira le dernier. II est ne coiffe. C'est une economie de bouts de cbandelle. Qui compte sans son bote compte deux fois. C'est un ecliantillon de la piece. C'est un enfant de la balle. II est bon d' avoir deux cordes a son arc. A quelque cbose malheur est bon. Mauvaise herbe croit toujours. Bon cbien chasse de race. Tel pere, tel fils. Le mieux est I'ennemi du bien. Qui m'aime, aime mon chien. Un malheur ne vient jamais seul. L'homme propose et Dieu dispose. Les petits ruisseaux font les grandes rivieres. Argent fait tout. II faut battre le fer quand il est chaud. Qui ne risque rien n'a rien. La necessite est la mere de I'in- dustrie. Necessite n'a point de loi. Aussitot dit, aussitot fait. L'habit ne fait pas le moine. Mal d'autrui n'est que songe. TOPULAR SAYINGS. 257 50. Out of the abundance of the heart the mouth spealceth. 51. Out of sight, out of mind. 52. Out of the frying pan into the fire. 53. One sioallow makes no sum- mer. 54. Patient icaiters are no losers. 55. Practice makes perfect. 56. Speak of the devil, he is sure to appear. 57. A soft answer turneth aivay icrath. 58. Strike ivhile the iron is hot. 59. Still VKiters run dee}?. 60. Silence gives consent. 61. Sufficient for the day is the evil thereof. 62. Set a thief to catch a thief. 63. 'Tis the last straio that breaks the cameVs back. 64. The better the day, the better the deed. 65. Tit for tat. 63. The more, the merrier. 67. The pitcher goes so often to the well, that at last it gets broken. 68. It is the first step that counts. 69. The pot can^t call the kettle black. ■* 70. There is no rose ivithout a thorn. 71. That's robbing Peter to pay Paul. 72. There are tico sides to every story. 73. Thori is many a .slip betvjeen the cup and the lip. Quand le coeur est plein , il deborde. Loin des yeux, loin du coeur. Tomber de Charybde en Scylla. Une hirondelle ne fait pas le printemps. Tout vient a point a qui sait at- tendre. A force de forger oil devient forgeron. Quand on parle du loup, on en voit la queue. Petite pluie abat grand vent. Battez le fer pendant qu'il est cliaud. II n'est pire eau que celle qui dort. Qui ne dit mot consent. A cbaque jour sufQt sa peine. A voleur, voleur et demi. C'est la goutte qui fait deborder le vase. A bon jour, bonne oeuvre. A bon chat, bon rat. Plus on est de fous, plus on rit. Taut va la cruche a I'eau qu'a la fin elle se brise. C'est le premier pas qui coute. La pelle se moque du fourgon. II n'y a pas de rose sans epines. C'est decouvrir S* Pierre pour couvrir S^ Paul. Toute medaille a un revers. II y a loin de la coupe aux levres. 258 POPULAR SAYINGS. 74. They are hand and glove to- gether. 75. To kill two birds ivith one stone. 76. They agree like cats and dogs. 77. To calory coals to Neiocastle. 78. To build castles in the air. 79. The die is cast. 80. Vinegar doesn't catch flies. 81. When you are ivith the Ro- mans, do as the Romans do. 82. You should not look a gift horse in the mouth. 83. You m^ust cut your coat ac- cording to your cloth. 84. You can't eat your cake and keep it too. 85. You cannot have of a cat more than her skin. 86. You come the day after the fair. Ce sont cleiix tetes clans nn bonnet Faire d'une pierre deux coups. C'est le feu et I'eau. Porter de I'eau a la riviere. Batir des chateaux en Espagne. Le sort en est jete. On n'attrape pas les mouches avec du vinaigre. Quand on est avec les loups 11 faut liurler. A cheval donne on ne regarde pas a la bride. Selon ta bourse, gouverne ta bouclie. On ne pent pas etre et avoir ete. II ne sort point de farine d'un sac a cliarbon. C'est de la moutarde apres diner. FRENCH. 43 First French Course, By C. A. Chardenal, Bachelier ^s Lettres de I'Universite de France. i6mo, cloth, 274 pages. Price, 60 cents. THIS book has been prepared for all who wish to begin or continue the study of French ; and by the simplicity of the language, the careful progression of the exercises, and the thor- oughness of the treatment, is adapted to the wants of all pupils between the ages of twelve and seventeen. The First Course in itself supplies all the instruction necessary for reading, intelli- gently, easy French prose. Professor Scheie De Vere, U?iiversity of Virginia : After a painstaking examination, I can endorse Chard enaVs French Course as the work of an experienced, highly gifted teacher. The Junior and the Advanced Courses are admirably arranged, and cannot fail to bring the student almost imperceptibly forward, till teacher and pupil alike feel that the task is accomplished. I am sure the volumes reed only to be well known to be very generally adopted. Professor A. Marshall Elliott, Johns Hopkins University : We have adopted both the Advanced and First Courses in our work in this Uni- versity. I like them better than anything else I have seen in English, Professor Samuel B. Platner, Adelbert College, Cleveland, O. : I have used the books of Chardenal's Series with my classes during this year and am exceedingly well pleased with them. They are the best that I know of, for the purpose intended. Second French Course. French Syntax and Reader, by C. A. CHARDENAL. i6mo, cloth, 250 pages. Price, 60 cents. THE Second Course aims to develop a mastery of all the principles of Syntax, as well as ease and fluency in French conversation. < French Exercises for Advanced Pupils. By C. A. Chardknal. i6n'io, cloth, 331 pages. Price, 90 cents. THIS book contains the principal rules of French Syntax, numerous French and English exercises on rules and idioms, and a long list of French idioms and phrases. 44 FRENCH. Complete French Course. Based on the First and Second French Courses of C. A. Chardenal. i6mo, cloth, 359 pages. Price, ^i.oo. THE Complete French Course is based on ChardenaPs First and Second Courses and includes the exercises from both these books. Since its pubhcation it has met with a degree of success which has proved beyond question its complete fitness to aid pupils in gaining a sound knowledge of the principles of the French language. The special features of the book which have contributed to its success are : clearness and simplicity of lan- guage in the statement of rules; the carefully graded exercises which are peculiarly adapted to drill on forms and syntax ; the lessons on the personal pronouns ; and the manner in which the subjunctive mood and irregular verbs have been treated. The book also contains an Appendix giving a resume of all needed rules for the formation of the plural and feminine of nouns and adjectives. There are complete tables for the conjugation of regular and irregular verbs, together with other useful lists. Ten pages of colloquial prose form an easy stepping-stone to the French Reader. A full index has been inserted in the last edition. The book contains one hundred and twenty exercises and can be readily mastered within the school year. Irene Saniewska, IIo/>e Street High School, Providence, R.I.: I have used Chardenal's Complete French Course for a long time and have obtained most satisfactory results. It is simple and clear, and the sentences, both French and English, are such as one would be likely to use in conversa- tion. I would recommend it in particular to English teachers who teach French. D. C. Fan, Academy, Glen Falls, N.Y.: For the past two years we have used the Chardenal with our classes, and it affords me great pleasure to say that it has given us complete satisfaction. There may be better text- books on that subject, but if so, our attention has not been called to them. T. F. Crane, Cornell University, Ithaca, N.Y.: I have not found anything so good as Chardenal's Complete French Course. Samuel J. Brun, Leland Stanford, Jr., University, Califo7-??ia : The Char- denal is the best text-book for beginners in French in University work that I know of. FRENCH, 45 Complete French Course. Abbie I. Durkee, Hi^h School, Malde?t, Mass.: After examining many text- books, I find Chardenal's the most practical. I took a copy of it to Eu- rope, with several other grammars, and asked a competent teacher of French to look them over and tell me which was the best from a French- man's point of view. Chardenal's gained the most complimentary praise. Ellen Sullivan, High School, Alba?iy, N.Y.: We are using Chardenal's Complete French Course in our school, and we think there is nothing that could take its place for our use. Harriet M. Bliss, High School, Bingha7nton, N. Y.: We have used the Chardenal in our school, especially in the first year French classes, for several years, and are very well satisfied with the book. William C. Ladd, Haverfoj-d College, Pa.: I think the Chardenal admirably adapted to younger students beginning the language, and were I teach- ing in a secondary school I feel that I should use it. Emily E. Winward, High School, Fall River, Mass.: I continue to like Chardenal's Complete French Course ; and we not only use it in all our classes, but I always recommend it to those who wish to gain a sufficient knowledge of the French language to permit them to travel in France with profit and some degree of pleasure. Z. W. Coombs, PolytecJuiic bistitute, Worcester, Mass.: I have given Char- denal's Complete French Course a somewhat hasty examination, but find that it confirms all the good I have heard of it, and that has been a great deal. It seems to possess all the good points of the many " Courses " published, and few of their defects. H. L. Belisle, High School, Lawrence, Mass.: I take pleasure in speaking a good word for Chardenal's Complete French Course, because the work deserves it. All things considered, it seems to me that for a combination grammar and exercise book it could hardly be improved upon. H. E. Webb, High School, Geneva, N.Y.: I have used the Complete Course during the past year with great success. I consider it by far the best introductory text-book in use at the present time. The arrange- ment is both logical and practical, and the exercises lead to a thorough elementary knowledge of the language. Mary Abigail Stevens, High School, Lewiston, Mai^ie : I have used Chardenal's Complete Course for four years and have found it satis- factory. Although I have meanwhile examined many other grammars, I have found nothing for which I would exchange Chardenal. 46 FRENCH, Preparatory French Reader. With Notes and Vocabulary. By GEORGE W. ROLLINS, Master in the Public Latin School, Boston. i6mo, cloth, 314 pages. Price, 90 cents. FICTION, history, poetry, and the drama are represented by the selections, which are thoroughly French in spirit. The historical pieces, with Napoleon, Louis XVI., and Marie Antoinette as dominant figures, will interest young readers in a fascinating period of French history, and will be of permanent value. The selection from the drama will serve as a capital introduc- tion to that kind of literature of which the French are the ac- knowledged masters. The freshness and the value of the material are indicated by the names of Ortoli, Lemaitre, Topffer, Marbot, St. Armand, Duruy, Lavergne, Labiche, Martin, and Laboulaye. The Vocabulary will be found to be especially rich in w^ords of every-day use. It contains explanations of the common idiomatic expressions found in the text, and its mastery will insure the easy and rapid reading of general French literature. A list of irregu- lar verbs, with their conjugations, accompanies the Vocabulary. The Notes are such as will enable the pupil to read rapidly and thoroughly. They serve to explain the historical and literary references in the texc, to help the pupil over the more difficult places, and to call his attention to some grammatical principles. John Tetlow, Principal of Girls High School, Boston : I have examined it with much interest and pleasure. The freshness, variety, and intrinsic value of the selections give the book a literary charm apart from its ser- viceableness as a manual for the class-room ; and the unusually discrimi- nating notes give help just where, and only where, the pupil will need it. Frederic T. Famsworth, Sanborn Seminary^ Kingston, NH. : I consider it a most excellent and attractive book in the variety and character of the selections, and the value of Vocabulary, Notes, and Verb List. John R. Effinger, Jr., University of Michigan : 1 am using the book with two of my sections in beginning French, and find it very satisfactory. Professor Sylvester Primerj University of Texas : It is all you claim for it, and I believe it superior to others of the same grade. I shall use it next year in my Freshman French. FRENCH AND GERMAN. Readings from French History. Edited by Professor O. B. Super, Dickinson College, Carlisle, Pa. i6mo, cloth, 324 pages. Price, $1.00. THE choice of the selections, and to some extent also of the authors represented, has been detennined by the wants of the class room ; and, in order that the selections might be inter- esting, complete episodes have, so far as possible, been given. The notes are brief, and are for the most part confined to the explanation of words used in an unusual sense, or of obscure historical points. The object in the selection has been to present such extracts from the best French historians as will enable the student to judge of their style and manner of treatment. With but one exception the selections are arranged in the chronological order of the events narrated. The accuracy of the text has been insured by consultation of various French, English, and German editions of the authors quoted. The selections are from the following; authors : — Conquete de I'Angleterre. Jeanne d'Arc. Situation du Peiiple avant la Revolution. Prise de la Bastille. Discours de Vergniaud. Chute de Robespierre. Le Decret de Berlin et I'Entrevue de Tilsit. Napoleon a x^Ioscou. Napoleon a Sainte-Helene. Historie de la Civilisation en Europe. Professor B. L. Bowen, Ohio State University : It seems to me not only a very attractive book in the matter of letter-press, etc., but in scope and subject-matter is far better than anything of the kind that we have had, I am very much pleased with it. Thierry . Barante . . . . Louis Blanc . . Michelet . . . Lamartine Mignet . Lanfrey . Segur . Theirs . Guizot 48 FRENCH. The Ca Ira Series of French Plays. Edited by Professor B. W. WELLS, of the University of the South. 6 volumes, i6mo, cloth. Each, 36 cents. THE plays selected have not heretofore been edited for use in American schools. The series contains works adapted to the most varied needs, but these works are so treated as to ex- clude all expressions or suggestions which could stand in the way of their use in mixed classes. The introductions give brief biographies of the authors and such comment on their work as may seem helpful. The Notes explain peculiarities of idiom that would not naturally be sought in a dictionary. Allusions to social and political customs, as well as to literature andliistory, receive such comment as will aid the pupil to put himself in the place of the original audience. In this way it is hoped that the reading of these plays will help the student not only in the study of French, but also in the development of a literary taste. The following works are contained in the series : — Moi, par Labiche et Martin. Gringoire, par Theodore de Banville, et L'Ete de la Saint Martin, par Meilhac et Helevy. La Question d' Argent, par Alexandre Dumas, y^/j. La Camaraderie, par Eugene Scribe. Le Luthier de Cremone, et Le Tresor, par Fran9ois Coppee. Le Fils de Giboyer, par Emile Augier. Professor A. G. Cameron, Yale University : The volumes" are as admi- rable in editing as they are dainty in form. Professor H. A. Rennert, University of Pennsylvania : It (Moi) is an excellent book in every way, and I shall use it. Professor George D. Fairfield, University 0/ Illinois : I heartily commend both the editorial and typographical excellence apparent all through it (Moi). Professor W. A. Cooper, Marietta College, Ohio : I have already used two of the Qa Ira Series with classes and shall use another this term. The books are not only very delightful to look at, but the editor's work gives the student just what help he needs.